JP6497277B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, comprising a benefit unit to benefit to the player by the game ball of winning hole or the like in the game area passes, Itaruka ability gaming machine sphere arrives from multiple directions to the benefit means Yes (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-144218 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow of the ball to the profit means .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a good gaming machine in which a ball flows down to profit means .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is arranged in a game area where game balls flow down and distributes the game balls to two channels of the first channel or the second channel. A first profit means that allows a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the distribution means to pass through the game ball and that gives a player a benefit by passing the game ball; A gaming machine comprising: a second profit means that allows a game ball passing through the downstream to pass through and a profit is given to the player by passing the game ball , wherein the first flow path of the second profit means The predetermined means disposed on the upstream side of the first is formed in a manner capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first flow path in the direction toward the second profit means, The flow path of the game ball flowing down the second flow path is defined as the second profit hand. A first path facing to the branches can configured in the second path deviating from the second earnings means, the game balls distributed to the first flow path, from the game balls distributed to the second flow path also, the ratio toward the front Stories second profit means is increased.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, comprising a board box .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the flow of the ball to the profit means .

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect , the control board can be accommodated in the board box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface lower unit. (A) is a front view of a base member, a 1st out port, a 2nd out port, a lower left board member, and a lower right board member, (b) is a base member in the XVb-XVb line of Drawing 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of a lower left board member. It is a front perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from the reference | standard horizontal line of a projection part. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an effect member and the 2nd drive. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a back surface perspective view of the transmission member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a back surface perspective view of a movement contact member. (A) And (b) is a back surface perspective view of a transmission member, (c) And (d) is a top view of a transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main body member of the production member typically. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is the partial front view of the rotation arm member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the partial top view of the rotation arm member in the arrow LXIXb direction view of FIG. 69 (a), (c ) Is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the tilting operation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the flow-path formation unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a direction change part, (b) is a top view of the direction change part in the arrow LXXIVb direction view of FIG. 74 (a), (c) is FIG. 74 (a). FIG. 74D is a side view of the direction changing portion when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIVc, and FIG. 74D is a side view of the direction changing portion when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIVd of FIG. (A) is a front view of a recessed part, (b) is sectional drawing of the recessed part in the LXXVb-LXXVb line | wire of FIG. 75 (a), (c) is FIG. 75 (a). It is sectional drawing of the recessed part in a LXXVc-LXXVc line. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a flow-path formation unit. (A) is the partial front view of a flow-path formation unit, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the flow-path formation unit in the LXXVIIIb-LXXVIIIb line | wire of Fig.78 (a), (c) is a flow path. It is a partial front view of a formation unit, (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the flow-path formation unit in the LXXVIIId-LXXVIIId line | wire of FIG.78 (c). FIG. 79 is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow path forming unit along line LXXIX-LXXIX in FIG. 78 (a). (A) to (c) are partial front views of the game board. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of a flow path formation unit. It is a partial front view of the flow path formation unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) is the fragmentary front view of the flow-path formation unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the flow-path formation unit in the LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb line | wire of Fig.86 (a), (c ) Is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow path forming unit along the line LXXXVId-LXXXVId in FIG. 86 (c). It is a partial front view of the flow path formation unit in 11th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 57, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640b, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, 13 is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. The first variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board surface lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640b. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640b, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning slot 640b. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (short-time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 640b. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and short time, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640b is opened is changed, which is longer time than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640b as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640b, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the time shortage, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640b is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric combination 640a is opened at the time when the electric combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640b is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in a short period of time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640b or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time is not given. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640b (starting winning) is used as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 b is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities to open the electric combination 640a of the second winning opening 640b. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640b during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to enter the second prize opening 640b during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640b through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640b, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640b is also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640b are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize slot 640b, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640b may be five.

  The second winning port 640b is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640b. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640b.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640b during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big win is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640b. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640b than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640b, and the ball is in a state where it can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640b are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640b. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640b is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640b. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640b so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640b.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a first specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second circular shape having the same size as the other winning holes 63, 64, and 640 is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640b becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a that are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b (for opening and closing rightward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). FIG. 15 shows only the outer shape). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Specifically, the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened / closed to the left by using a front-opening triangular opening / closing plate disposed on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the left, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning port 650a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the state.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to cause the second variable prize-winning device 650 to win a ball by making a left strike, eliminating the troublesomeness of switching between left strike and right strike each time the gaming state changes. can do.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning ports 65a and 650a is triggered for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning ports 65a and 650a while the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the number of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of plural (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, Not only on the left side of the variable display device 80, for example, it may be below the first winning port 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 314 and a second out port 315. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out port 314 or the second out port 315 (not shown). Guided to the road. The first out port 314 is disposed on the lower left side of the first winning port 64, while the second out port 315 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64. That is, the second out port 315 is disposed on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a sphere that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) in front of the first winning port 64 is the inner rail 61. Alternatively, it flows down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while at the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view. The reached ball flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 431, 466, 531, 561, 631, 661, 751.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a housing structure for the units 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front. FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the composite operation unit 500 is mounted on the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 200 includes a vertical operation unit 400, a composite operation unit 500, a tilt operation unit 600, and a slide operation unit 700 that are housed in the internal space of the back case 210.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 500 is disposed at the upper right portion of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 7). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 are disposed below the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the composite operation unit 500 in a stacked state and accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the combined operation unit 500) is disposed in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the vertical motion unit 400, the composite motion unit 500, the tilt motion unit 600 and the slide motion unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 8 shows a state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical operation unit 400 is arranged at the extended position, and in FIG. 9, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the combined operation unit 500 shows the extended state. FIG. 10 shows the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the substantially center in the width direction.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 moves the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is in the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the composite operation unit 500 is arranged at a projecting position where the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211 a of the back case 210 (that is, The extended state disposed on the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the revolving position in which the rotating arm member 550 is retreated upward, and the front plate member 546 of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 A reduced state (see FIG. 5) retracted upward can be formed. In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is configured such that the support member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the slide operation unit 700 is slid left and right, and the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang shown in FIG. It is possible to move between positions. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting operation unit 600 is retracted to the right outside the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened and the internal liquid crystal device is visually recognized. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211 a and the liquid crystal device inside the tilting operation unit 600. The player can visually recognize both of the effects displayed on the screen.

  Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the operation units 400 to 700 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). Those having different layers may be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inward from the opening 211a of the back case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, the operation units 400 to 700 are not only operated individually but also can be combined with each other, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400 are disposed at the extended position, and the door member 470. Is formed in an open state.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the composite operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400. Since the lens member 460 is subjected to magnifying lens processing, as will be described later, the front plate member 546 is enlarged.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the combined operation unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down. When the front plate member 546 is moved to a position away from the lens member 470 in front view (see FIG. 39), the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size. Thereby, the state in which the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size and the state in which the front plate member 546 is enlarged (see FIG. 11) can be switched, and the production effect can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the retracted position and in the tilted state, and the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are placed. A state immediately before the contact is illustrated. When the tilting operation unit 600 is further tilted, the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the composite operation unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect that makes it appear as if force is applied from the tilt operation unit 600 to the composite operation unit 500. (The operations of the units can be linked to create a more complicated performance). Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Next, the panel surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, a receiving opening 13 a that is opened along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted is formed in the lower part of the game board 13.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 that is fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a ball that is disposed on the lower left side of the base member 310 when viewed from the front. A lower left plate member 320 for guiding to 314, a lower right plate member 330 for guiding a sphere to the second out port 315 disposed at the lower right of the base member 310 when viewed from the front, and a lower left plate fixedly fastened to the base member 310 from the front. The member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 mainly include a front lid member 340 that is pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 343.

  The base member 310 has a plate-like main body 311 that is substantially the same shape as the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and has a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a, and a front side of the main body 311. The decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, the movable effect member 313 attached to the substantially central portion in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and the left side of the movable effect member 313 in front view. A first out port 314 that is a rectangular hole, and a second out port 315 that is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the movable effect member 313 when viewed from the front.

  The movable effect member 313 includes a rotation effect member 313a that is disposed at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13 and is rotated by a driving device (not shown). Here, when the out port is disposed at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction, the movable effect member 313 cannot be disposed at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction. In the present embodiment, the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 are disposed at positions spaced left and right from the center of the game board 13 without arranging the outlet at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions the movable production | presentation member 313 in the width direction center lower edge of the game board 13 is securable.

  With reference to FIG. 15, the shape of the 1st out port 314, the 2nd out port 315, the lower left board member 320, and the lower right board member 330 is demonstrated. FIG. 15A is a front view of the base member 310, the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 taken along line XVb-XVb. In FIG. 15A, the outer shape of the front lid member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nail formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are illustrated.

  The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. Compared to the first out port 314, the second out port 315 has a shorter length in the width direction. The reason will be described later. In addition, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner surface of the second out port 315. By the guide rib 315a, the sphere flowing into the second out port 315 splashes high, and the resistance applied to the sphere when colliding with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315 can be suppressed. Moreover, the flow of the sphere discharged from the second out port 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and variations in the direction of the discharged sphere can be suppressed.

  Further, a buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 described later is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15A). Thereby, also in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the falling height of the ball, so that the impact when the dropped ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 may increase. On the other hand, since the buffer rib 322 is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the cushion rib 322 is bent closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, so that the cushioning effect is reduced. The degree can be increased.

  Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling sphere will be described. For example, if the falling height of a sphere landing on the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is high, but the frequency of the sphere reaching the position is extremely low, obstacles to the discharge of other spheres without bothering the bounce of the sphere. It may not be. In this case, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased, the space of the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only by the drop height of the sphere, but also by the relationship between the drop height and the frequency at which the sphere lands at that position.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the sphere flowing down above the buffer ribs 322 and 332 starts to flow along paths c1 and c2, and then reaches a landing area z0 to z4 via a plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, the probability that the sphere will flow down is equal (1/2) between the paths c1 and c2, and the probability of branching left and right at the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). Will be explained. It is assumed that the sphere never flows down from the upper right.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the path c11. It can be considered that the branch b5 is reached from the route c1 via the branch b1 and the route c2 is reached. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c11 and the sphere reaches the landing area z0 is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2), Since it is expressed by the sum of the probability of a sphere flowing down from the path c2 and 1/4 (= 1/2 × 1/2), it is 3/8 (“^” means a power). That is, the respective probabilities are the product of the probability 1/2 that the sphere will flow down the paths c1 and c2 and the number that is a power of 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 through which the sphere passes before reaching the landing area z0. It is represented by

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z1 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z1, the branch b3 flows down the left side to reach the path c15, the branch b4 flows down the left side and reaches the path c16, or the branch b6 flows down the right side to reach the path c14. Or it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the path c13.

  Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). Also, until the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and there are four branches until the sphere reaches the path c16, so the probability that the sphere reaches the path c16 is 1/32 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 4). Further, until the branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c14, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c14 is 1/16. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

  Up to the branch b7, both cases where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable. There are four branches and three branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c1 reaches the path c13. May exist. There are two branches until the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c13 is 3/32 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 3), which is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1. This is 7/32 because it is expressed by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c2 and 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2).

  Here, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing region z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probability that the sphere reaches the paths c13 to c16 described above.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z2 can be expressed by the probability that the sphere reaches the route c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere that reaches the branch b7 reaches the route c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z2 is 7/32.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the path c17, or flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the path c18.

  Up to the branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are six branches before the sphere reaches the path c17, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). Further, until the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered. Since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c18 is 1/256. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  The probability of the sphere reaching the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probability of the sphere reaching the paths c17 and c18 described above.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 to reach the path c19. It is assumed that all the spheres that have flowed down on the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the path c19. The probability that the sphere reaches the path c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere that reaches the branch b10 reaches the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  From these facts, the rate at which the sphere reaches each landing area z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio has a correlation with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

  For example, when comparing the landing area z1 and the landing area z3, the heights of the spheres falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, but the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is the landing area z3. It is smaller than z1. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z1. That is, even if the bounding of the falling sphere is not suppressed as much as the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the discharge of the sphere is delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing region z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing region z1.

  For example, when comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is greater than the falling distance of the sphere to the landing area z2, but the falling distance of the sphere to the landing area z4 is longer. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z2. That is, even if the bounding of the falling sphere is not suppressed as much as the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the sphere will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing region z4, the position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing region z2.

  In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). However, by changing the width of the nail, the spheres at the branches b1 to b10 are changed. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by reducing the distance between the nails in the flow path through which the left arrow of the branch b1 passes to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, the probability of the sphere flowing down along the right arrow at the branch b1 is greater than ½. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of branching of the sphere can be adjusted similarly.

  Thereby, the frequency with which a sphere reaches the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

  Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed so as to be inclined downward as the upper surface goes rearward (see FIG. 15B). Thereby, the ball flow to the 1st out mouth 314 can be made quick.

  Returning to FIG. The lower left plate member 320 includes a long plate-like main body portion 321, buffer ribs 322 in which thin plates connected in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 extend in the front-rear direction, and the buffer ribs 322, a front plate 323 formed in a manner to connect the front surface of 322, a step portion 324 formed to protrude upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extends from the step portion 324 leftward when viewed from the front. And a shaft support hole 326 drilled in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body 321 when viewed from the front.

  The buffer rib 322 is a portion through which a sphere toward the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the rebound of the sphere falling in the vertical direction in the vertical direction. That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed from a thin plate that is continuously provided in the left-right direction, the impact of the collision can be reduced by bending in the thickness direction when the buffer rib 322 is collided with the falling ball. Further, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer rib 322, the ball is braked by being caught between the buffer ribs 322. In addition, the buffer rib 322 has a formation height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the inner side in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) to the right of the front view.

  The connection front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer rib 322 by connecting the buffer rib 322.

  The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for dropping the sphere flowing down from the sphere flow rail portion 325 in the vertical direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the load of the left-right direction is applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball | bowl which flows down the ball | bowl flow rail part 325. FIG. Thereby, it can prevent that the buffer rib 322 receives the load of the left-right direction, and bends in the left-right direction.

  That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed from a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, the buffer rib 322 may be broken when a load in the left-right direction is applied. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 that has a speed in the left-right direction and that may apply a load in the left-right direction to the buffer rib 322 moves up and down from the step portion 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed so as to fall in the direction. Thereby, the position where the sphere lands on the buffer rib 322 can be moved to the right in the width direction as the speed of the sphere in the left-right direction increases.

  Accordingly, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be reduced toward the left (outside) in the width direction. For this reason, as the shock absorber rib 322 moves to the left in the width direction, the risk of bending due to the load in the left-right direction of the sphere decreases, and the aspect ratio of the shock absorber rib 322 can be made smaller than that on the right in the width direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is disposed as compared with the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered downward.

  Here, with the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 kept constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (with the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface. However, in this case, the arrangement position of the step portion 324 is increased, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed to be inclined downward toward the step portion 324 is also increased. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) is increased, and the game area is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 is larger, the action of reducing the momentum of the sphere (deceleration action) becomes larger. Therefore, the buffer rib 322 is formed in such a manner that the aspect ratio increases from the vicinity of the step portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

  The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as that of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 until the front of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (in the middle of the buffer rib 322 in the horizontal direction). It is also possible that the maximum height is formed. However, in this case, the sphere that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. For this reason, the sphere is likely to stay in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the sphere.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 is small, the sphere that has reached the landing region z1 is easily turned to the left (landing region z2 side). Move. Accordingly, since the sphere can flow to the landing area z2 before the sphere stays in the landing area z1, the discharge of the sphere can be made smooth.

  Further, the step portion 324 has a function of blocking a sphere that flows down the buffer rib 322 and flows to the left. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing back beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

  The shaft support hole 326 is a portion that is inserted and supported by the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340.

  The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-like main body portion 331, buffer ribs 332 each having a thin wall portion extending in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331, and extending in the front-rear direction. A connecting front plate 333 formed in a manner to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed to be depressed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the recessed portion 324 A ball flow rail portion 335 extending to the front and a shaft support hole 336 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left end of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front.

  The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body 331 is the main body 321, the buffer rib 332 is the buffer rib 322, the connection front plate 333 is the connection front plate 323, the ball flow rail portion 335 is the ball flow rail portion 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is the shaft support hole 336. Since the technical idea is common to each of the support holes 326, the description of the common parts is omitted.

  The buffer ribs 332 are formed with shorter left and right widths than the buffer ribs 322. As a result, the left and right formation widths of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward compared to the first out port 314, and accordingly, the first variable. The space for disposing the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 can be secured (the disposing position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

  Here, the reason why the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 is that the flow path of the sphere to the second out port 315 is restricted. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged at the upper right of the second out port 315 when viewed from the front, so that the ball flows into the first specific winning port 65a when the opening / closing plate is opened, When the opening / closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down from the upper right in the front view to the second out port 315. In other words, a non-flowing region where the flow of the sphere is restricted is formed in the upper right part of the second out port 315.

  Therefore, the flow direction of the sphere to the lower right plate member 330 is limited only to the vertical drop and the flow from the width direction (from the sphere flow rail portion 335) (flow from the diagonally upper right is restricted). . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the sphere from the upper right side, the direction in which the sphere jumps can be restricted, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be reduced, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be reduced. As a result, an arrangement space for the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

  The recessed portion 334 is a recess for causing the ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 to splash. Therefore, the formation width of the recessed portion 334 is a width that allows the ball to be placed without contacting the adjacent buffer rib 332.

  The sphere that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334, rebounds by contacting the upper surface of the recessed portion 334, and falls onto the buffer rib 332. Thereby, it can prevent that a load is applied to the buffer rib 332 from the width direction, and it can prevent that the buffer rib 332 breaks.

  The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing a fastening screw into the fastening hole B in order to fasten and fix the board surface lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both an effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from being broken and an effect of facilitating the fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

  The front lid member 340 has a plate-like main body part 341 in which the first winning opening 64 is formed at the uppermost part, an opening part 342 that is formed in the center of the main body part 341 and makes the rotation effect member 313a visible. It mainly includes a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the flow direction of the sphere is limited by the side wall portion. That is, a sphere that has collided with the main body 341 from the right cannot penetrate to the left, while a sphere that collided with the main body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

  The insertion shaft 343 is a portion inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is slightly smaller than the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  Next, the vertical operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. 16 and 17 show a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position.

  18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical motion unit 400 includes a base member 410 that includes a vertical groove 414 that is recessed from the back side to the front side on the right side in the rear view and that the recess extends in the vertical direction. The rotating crank member 420 rotated around the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, the driving device 430 for generating the driving force of the rotating crank member 420, and the driving force transmitted from the rotating crank member 420 to the base member 410. The arm member 440 swings around the shaft portion 412 and the upper and lower grooves 414 of the base member 410 are arranged on the opposite side of the base member 410 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. The slide member 450 and the slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 are suspended in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. A lens member 460 is slidably formed mainly includes a pair of door member 470 which is respectively pivotally supported on the lens member 460, a.

  The base member 410 has a main body portion 411 that is formed in a plate shape that is long on the left and right sides, and a columnar projection that protrudes from the right end portion of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 that is supported, a connecting hole 413 that is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and that connects the rotating crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and is formed from the back side to the front side on the right side of the main body portion 411 when viewed from the back side. The upper and lower groove portions 414 in which the hollows to be formed extend in the vertical direction, and the concave portions 415 that are recessed from the front to the back side on both right and left outer sides of the upper and lower groove portions 414 are mainly provided.

  The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 of the composite operation unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, since the swinging angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state, the combined operation unit 500 oscillates the expansion / contraction effect device 540, thereby Colliding with the left and right inner surfaces is prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion where the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

  The rotating crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421, a sliding protrusion 422 that protrudes in a columnar shape from one end of the main body portion 421 to the front side, and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. And an engagement portion 423 that is engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and disables relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420.

  When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the driving device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440 and the arm member 440 is swung around the shaft portion 412. .

  The drive device 430 includes a drive motor 431 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431a that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 431, a transmission gear 432 that meshes with the drive gear 431a, and a transmission gear 432 thereof. And a fitting portion 432a which is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connection hole 413 and whose inner side surface is fitted to the engaging portion 423 of the rotating crank member 420.

  The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a depression having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each vertex of a triangle, and is inserted into the connection hole 413 of the base member 410, and at the leading end side thereof, the rotating crank member 420. The engaging portion 423 is fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed so as to be sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420, and as described above, the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 cannot be rotated relative to each other. The transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 rotate in synchronization. That is, the driving force of the driving motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

  The arm member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in a long bar shape, a shaft support hole 442 that is drilled on the base end side (right side in front view) and is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side A sliding hole 443 that is formed as a long hole in the swing end side that is the opposite end of the lens member 460 and the sliding projection 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding projection 422 of the rotating crank member 420 is inserted. The bottomed hole-shaped insertion portion 444 is mainly provided.

  The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set so that the rotating crank member 420 can rotate once in a state where the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted through the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can perform a swinging operation regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 420.

  The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 that extends rearward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 451, and is guided by the recessed portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable. A central guide recess 453 that is a recess extending in the vertical direction formed in the front surface at the center in the width direction of 451 and through which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and both left and right ends of the main body 451 And a both-end guide recessed portion 454 that is formed on the front surface and extends in the vertical direction and guides the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460.

  The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 461 having a circular opening at the center, a magnifying lens 462 having a magnifying lens process fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and the center in the width direction of the main body portion 461. A sliding projection 463 that protrudes toward the back side at the upper end and is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 443 of the arm member 440, and protrudes and slides toward the back side at both ends in the width direction of the main body 461. A stable slide portion 464 that is inserted into the both-end guide recessed portion 454 of the member 450 so as to be slidable up and down, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side of the door member 470 that are rotatably disposed on the lower left side of the main body portion 461 when viewed from the front. A pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted and a drive motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown) are mainly provided. That.

  With reference to FIG. 20, the moving operation of the vertical operation unit 400 will be described. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical operation unit 400. FIG. 20 illustrates a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the sliding of the lens member 460 that is pivotally supported by the sliding hole 443 on the rocking end side of the arm member 440. The moving projection 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid along the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450. Since the lens member 460 is guided in the vertical direction by the both-end guide recessed portion 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is guided in the vertical direction by the recessed portion 415 of the base member 410, the lens is rotated by the swing of the arm member 440. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

  Returning to FIG. 18 and FIG. The door member 470 is configured by splitting a circular plate into two parts, a lower main body part 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body part 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body part 471, and a lower side A lower shaft portion 473 that protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relatively, and a circle on the back side at the lower end portion of the upper body portion 472. And an upper shaft portion 474 that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The lower main body 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a that protrudes from a side that is in contact with the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 is a side that is in contact with the lower main body 471. The receiving recessed portion 472a is provided to be recessed. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recess 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be relatively aligned in the closed state. In the present embodiment, since the guide projection 471a projects in a tapered shape, the guide projection 471a can be received and securely fitted into the recess 472a.

  The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotating cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. Since the pair of rotating cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), the door member 470 is changed from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward.

  Thereby, compared with the case where a single cover member is swung to cover the front side of the lens member 460, the time for rocking the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be halved.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The compound operation unit 500 swings the turning arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the extended position (see FIG. 9), thereby arranging the expansion / contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Is a unit. In addition, the expansion / contraction production device 540 is formed to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

  22 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the combined operation unit 500. 22 and 23 show a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at a retracted position that is a terminal position formed outside the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the combined operation unit 500 is a unit that produces an effect by sliding and swinging the expansion / contraction production device 540, and includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, and the base member 510. The rotary plate 520 is formed to be rotatable around the first shaft portion 512 of the first, the first drive device 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and generates the driving force of the rotary plate 520, and is fastened to the front of the rotary plate 520. An expansion / contraction effect device 540 that is fixed and formed to be expandable / contractable in the radial direction of the rotating plate 520, and one end portion is connected to the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the other end portion on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. In addition, a swing arm member 550 that forms a telescopic motion of the telescopic effect device 540 by a swing motion, and a driving force of the rotational arm member 550 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 The second driving device 560 to be generated, the rotating crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the second driving device 560 to the rotating arm member 550, and the fastening and fixing from the front of the base member 510, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating And a front cover 580 for concealing a mechanism portion on the rotating shaft side such as the crank member 570.

  The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 projecting forward from a substantially central lower portion in the width direction of the main body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arc-shaped holes 513 drilled along a central arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arc-shaped holes 513b of the three rows of arc-shaped holes 513. A cylindrical second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. The second through-hole 516 to be drilled, the columnar third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end of the main body portion 511 when viewed from the front, and the forward bending from the edge of the main body portion 511 The bent wall portion 518 is mainly provided.

  The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520.

  The arc-shaped hole 513 includes a first arc-shaped hole 513a, a second arc-shaped hole 513b, and a third arc-shaped hole 513c from the side close to the first shaft portion 512.

  The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are elongated holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotating plate 520 is inserted to guide the rotation of the rotating plate 520. Thereby, the load received by the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 illustrate a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525. The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are provided between the collar and the main body 521. Arranged between them (inserted before the collar is fastened).

  The second arc-shaped hole 513b is a long hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 is disposed and moved. The upper side of the substantially central part is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is arranged in the opened part. As a result, the meshing portion between the driving motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 can be disposed in the plate thickness portion of the main body 511, so that the thickness of the composite operation unit 500 can be increased. The vertical dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

  The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes into which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

  The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion that serves as a central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571 with the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 fastened and fixed to the front side. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

  The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotation arm member 550 and serves as a central axis of rotation of the rotation arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. Around the third shaft portion 517, a torsion spring 517a that generates a biasing force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position is wound.

  The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that the arm portions extend from both ends of the coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517, respectively. One arm portion is fixed to the lower right portion of the bent wall portion 518 when viewed from the front (near the first stopper portion 518a), and the other arm portion on the opposite side of the one arm portion is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. Locked to the stop 555.

  The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side of the first shaft portion 512. And a third stopper portion 518c formed on the main body.

  The first stopper portion 518 a is a portion that restricts the rotation of the rotation arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it comes into contact with the first stopper portion 518a, and the lowering is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is disposed below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotating plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotating plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the direction of rotation toward the second stopper portion 512b. Can do. That is, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later is formed so that the maximum angle of the clockwise rotation of the front view is larger than that of the counterclockwise rotation of the front view.

  The rotating plate 520 includes a fan-shaped main body 521, a shaft support hole 522 formed in a circular shape in the thickness direction at the root of the main body 521, and a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 that is linearly recessed on the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of telescopic stoppers 524 that are formed to project forward on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523, and projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 521 A plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525 and an arc-shaped rack projecting in an arc shape centering on the shaft support hole 522 from the back surface of the main body 521 and gear teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 mainly.

  The shaft support hole 522 is inserted through the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510. Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512.

  The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs an expansion / contraction operation along the extending direction of the rail reception groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520.

  The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a part that abuts the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction production device 540 in the vertical direction and regulates the movement width of the slide plate 544. It is formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and is in contact with the inner surface of the slide plate 544 on both sides thereof, so that the slide rail 545 is prevented from receiving a load in a direction perpendicular to the expansion / contraction direction, and durability is improved. Can be achieved.

  The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotating plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third circle. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 513c. In addition, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted into the second arc-shaped hole 513 b of the base member 510 and meshed with the driving gear 532 of the first driving device 530. Since the engagement portion between the arc-shaped rack 526 and the first driving device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension in the thickness direction of the combined operation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and rotated about the shaft by the drive motor 531.

  Next, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device 540.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion / contraction production device 540 includes a main body member 541 that forms a skeleton, and a pair of body members 541 that are fastened and fixed to the back surface of the main body member 541. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are disposed so as to be slidable along the extending direction of the insertion holes 542d and 543d. The slide plate 544 is connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, and one end of the slide plate 544 is fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 541. The front plate member 546 fastened and fixed, the connecting sliding member 547 slidably supported by the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the connecting sliding member 547 Mainly includes a decorative member 548 front drooping portion 548b is formed to be movable in the front of the body member 541 is fixed.

  The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 541a that forms a skeleton, a columnar protrusion portion 541b that protrudes toward the back side at the center in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and a rear surface of the protrusion portion 541b. A first raised fastening portion 541c that protrudes in a pair on the left side of the view, a second raised fastening portion 541d that protrudes in a pair on the right side in the rear view of the protrusion 541b, and a left upper portion in the rear view of the main body portion 541a A guide fastening portion 541e that protrudes and a fastening hole 541f that is formed in a plurality (three in the present embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and to which the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed are mainly provided.

  The protruding portion 541 b is a portion that is inserted through the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. Further, since the protruding portion 541b is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked when the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The reason why the second raised fastening portion 541d is longer in the vertical direction than the first raised fastening portion 541c is that a position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 is selected and disposed. Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass through the lower left portion of the main body member 541 in the rotation locus (see FIGS. 37, 40, and 44). Therefore, it is possible to increase the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d as compared to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and the rigidity of the second raised fastening portion 541d can be improved.

  The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided in the extended state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. That is, even if the protrusion 541 b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541 e guides to the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 in order to rotate the rotating arm member 550 upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

  The fastening hole 541f is a through hole to which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

  The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back regulating portion extending upward from a position where the first guiding member 542 rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a to the back side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c that protrudes in a wall shape from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 542b to the back surface, and a portion that protrudes toward the back surface at the upper end portion of the back surface restricting portion 542b are formed to penetrate vertically. And an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the back surface regulating portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

  The back surface restricting portion 542b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550 and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protruding portion 541b from dropping off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs the expansion / contraction operation, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide bar 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide bar 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 542.

  The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a back surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position where the second guide member 543 rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a toward the back side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c projecting like a wall from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 543b to the back surface, and a portion projecting to the back side at the upper end portion of the back surface restricting portion 543b are formed to penetrate vertically. The insertion hole 543d is mainly provided.

  The back surface restricting portion 543b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protruding portion 541b from dropping off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs the expansion / contraction operation, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide bar 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide bar 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 543.

  The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b formed with a wide recess extending in the vertical direction on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the recessed portion 544b. Both-end recessed portions 544c formed with recesses extending in the vertical direction on the front surfaces on the left and right sides, and rail receivers protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the both-end recessed portions 544c A portion 544d, a columnar slide bar 544e extending in the vertical direction inside the concave portions 544c at both ends, an effect auxiliary wall 544f protruding toward the front at a substantially vertical center of the main body 544a, The upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b mainly include stopper portions 544g that protrude toward the back at both left and right ends.

  The recessed portion 544 b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed slightly larger than the width dimension of the expansion / contraction stopper 524.

  The both-end recessed portion 544c is a portion that accommodates a protruding portion in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. Thereby, the projection part by which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are drilled can be guided from the outside.

  The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543. Thereby, the wobbling of the guide members 542 and 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

  The slide bar 544e is a columnar bar that is inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide bar 544e (the vertical direction in FIG. 26).

  The effect assisting unit 544f is a part that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 and moves the decorative member 548 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state. Thereby, the external appearance of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 540 can be changed.

  The stopper portion 544g is a portion that abuts on the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544.

  The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520, and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544 b of the slide plate 544.

  The front plate member 546 is an effect portion that can be visually recognized by the player, and has a plate-like main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in a front view, and the main body portion 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that protrude from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back side.

  The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

  The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that supports the connecting sliding member 547 in a slidable manner. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547.

  The connecting sliding member 547 is formed in a plate-like body portion 547a, a pair of sliding long holes 547b formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape and drilled in the front-rear direction, and in the vertical direction. And a pair of insertion holes 547c.

  The sliding long hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is formed slightly larger than that of the shaft support portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the distal end portion of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so that it cannot be pulled out. The The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

  The decorative member 548 is formed in a plate shape, and a main body portion 548a to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. And a rear drooping portion 548c formed by drooping downward on the rear side of the main body.

  When the connecting sliding member 547 moves relative to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b is covered with the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is separated from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37). Thereby, the external appearance of the expansion / contraction production | presentation member 540 can be changed and a production effect can be improved.

  The back drooping part 548c is a part that comes into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and the decorative member 548 is brought into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f by the back dripping part 548c. Is moved relative to the front plate member 546.

  Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. The rotating arm member 550 has a main body portion 551 that is formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 that is formed in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and a proximity to the shaft support hole 552. Then, the odd-shaped long hole 553 which is a specially shaped bottomed long hole formed on the back side of the main body 551 and the front side of the other end which is the end opposite to the one end. An arc-shaped hole 554 that is an arc-shaped bottomed long hole and a rear end projecting in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 552 of the main body 551, the tip of which is bent into a hook shape, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked The locking portion 555 is mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, thereby forming the rotating arm member 550 so as to be rotatable about the third shaft portion 517.

  The odd-shaped long hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed long hole 553 will be described later.

  The arc-shaped hole 554 is a long hole through which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 554 is slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. In addition, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 coincides with the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in the extended state (FIGS. 37 to 39). Until see).

  The arc-shaped hole 554 includes a mouth portion 554a that is open to the distal end portion of the other end portion of the rotating arm member 550 and has a wide width at the distal end portion.

  The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating crank member 570, and is inserted into the driving motor 561 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. And a drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561.

  The drive gear 562 is meshed with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570. Thereby, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

  The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550, and has a ring-shaped main body portion 571 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515 and an outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 571. The transmission gear teeth 572 provided, the regulating umbrella portion 573 formed in a manner covering the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572, and the sliding projecting to the front side at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 571 The projection part 574 and the cover part 575 which is formed with a diameter larger than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body part 571 and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft part 515 are mainly provided.

  The transmission gear teeth 572 are meshed with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570.

  The restricting umbrella portion 573 suppresses the drive gear 532 from being displaced to the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

  The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. In other words, whether or not the transmission of the driving force is formed is determined by the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550.

  The lid portion 575 is a portion for disposing the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  With reference to FIGS. 28 to 31, the relationship between the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. First, the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

  FIGS. 28A and 29A are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. FIG. FIG. 28A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed elongated hole 553 and the sliding projection 574 are shown as hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are shown as imaginary lines. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the rotating crank member 570 An upward orthogonal state in which the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position, a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574, and the rotating crank member 570. It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which the rotation axis and the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 552 are orthogonal to each other. FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 has been rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the downward orthogonal state described above.

  The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a in which a driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding projection 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall portion 553c coupled from the lower end of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d that couples the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a concave groove extending linearly to the left starting from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with such a length that the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 can move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the inner circumferential surface is formed slightly wider than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. Largely formed. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front orthogonal state, the rotating crank member 570 rotates idly with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm. Not transmitted to member 550.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is moved. The direction is directed to the rotational axis of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 due to the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is the rotation of the rotation crank member 570. Directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the second non-transmission wall portion 553c can be rotated from the lower wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position. This is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding projection 574 around the rotation axis of the member 570. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state of FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550.

  Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553 b is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. It is done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. Is directed to the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the second non-transmission wall 553c, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed from a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion in front view of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the right end portion in front view of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. It is formed above the curve obtained by extending the transmission wall portion 553b.

  The selection wall portion 553d is disposed to face the right portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding projection 574 exceeds the first non-transmission wall 553b and the second non-transmission. In the surplus portion D (see FIG. 32B) until the wall portion 553c is reached, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and rotation is not restricted. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 by the sliding protrusion 574 is not restricted.

  The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is The second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the angle formed between the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to cope with the change amount changes. That is, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other is as follows. The swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other. Accordingly, the swing arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the swing crank member 570 depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or the selection wall portion 553d. The speed can be changed.

  Returning to FIG. FIGS. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 28A, the above-described upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The rotated state is illustrated in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines. .

  28 to 31, the expansion / contraction production device 540 detects the posture of expanding and contracting in the vertical direction by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swinging is stopped in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, swinging of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented by resistance with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25).

  In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position that is vertically downward from the protrusion 541b by the distance h1. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protruding portion 541b is disposed at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated by the angle T1 counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a))). The sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) (FIG. 28B). ))). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)) to the counterclockwise angle T2 (T2≈180 degrees> T1). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the odd-shaped long hole 553 (transmission area), enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the protrusion 541 is the reference. It reaches a state of being arranged at a position separated from the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h2) vertically upward (see FIG. 29A). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28C, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) counterclockwise by an angle T3 (T3> T2). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  29A and 29B, when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is secondly directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, and thereby the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the state of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased to a value just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is reduced. If it is moderate, the effect of production cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is not stopped in the state of FIG. 29A but is rotated to the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 29A (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward). Thereby, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29A to the state shown in FIG. 570 can be decelerated. Therefore, it is not necessary to stop the rotating crank member 570 suddenly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the effect of the rotation arm member 550 and improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

  From the state of FIG. 29B, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) to the angle T4 (T4≈270 degrees> T3 counterclockwise). ), The sliding projection 574 is slid by the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  That is, while the rotating crank member 570 is rotated ¼ turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the protrusion 541b is in the same position. Maintained. In this embodiment, the rotation arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained in the same position during the rotation of the rotation crank member 570 by 1/4 turn. It need not be limited to that. The length in which the front plate member 546 continues to be disposed at the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length of the front plate member 546 that is continuously disposed at the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

  From the state of FIG. 30A, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) counterclockwise by an angle T5 (T5> T4). ), The sliding projection 574 pushes up the selection wall 553d of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3). (See FIG. 30B). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

  That is, when the turning arm member 550 and the turning crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding projection portion 574 are brought into contact with each other, thereby turning the turning arm member. The driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission region).

  From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and rotated counterclockwise by an angle T6 (T6> T5). The sliding protrusion 574 enters the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h2). The state (refer FIG. 31) arrange | positioned in the spaced apart position is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

  31, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553. The state of 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region).

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the state shown in FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. . In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, and thereby the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG.

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state shown in FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased to a value just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the decrease in the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is moderated. If it is set, the effect of production cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotation crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28A without stopping in the state of FIG. Can do. Thus, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. Can be made. Therefore, it is not necessary to stop the rotating crank member 570 suddenly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 linked to the rotating arm member 550 and improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotating crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotating arm member 550 can be reciprocally swung between the retracted position and the extended position.

  For these reasons, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b is positioned at the reference horizontal line in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically separated from O by a distance h1 to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The projection 541b is maintained at a position that is vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the projection 541b is maintained in the reference horizontal line O in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle. Is moved upward from a position separated vertically by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Here, at the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A). In the position, the turning arm member 550 and the turning crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29A). In addition, it is possible to form a downward orthogonal state by rotating the rotating crank member 570 by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state of FIG.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a turn (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotating arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28A to FIG. 29A). The time required for swinging from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29 (a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28 (a)) can be made equal.

  With reference to FIGS. 32 to 35, the relationship between the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. FIGS. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 32 to 35 show a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines and expanded and contracted. The front plate member 546 and the protruding portion 541b of the rendering device 540 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

  32A, the above-described upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32B to 35, the rotating arm from FIG. 32A is used. The state in which the member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount is illustrated in order along the time series.

  In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 32 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a))). The protrusion 574 is moved in the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  Note that, when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 32B, the movement of the sliding projection 574 is restricted, so that the swinging of the turning arm member 550 is restricted. The Therefore, the turning arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG.

  From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). 33), as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the sliding projection 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin part D from the state of FIG. 32B until the sliding projection 574 reaches the second non-transmission wall 553c beyond the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotating arm member 550 is provided. No driving force is transmitted (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

  From the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). 33), the sliding protrusion 574 is brought into contact with the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 that swings downward by the action of gravity, as shown in FIG. The That is, from the state of FIG. 33 (b) to the state of FIG. 34 (a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). In the state of FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O vertically upward by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

  From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (refer to FIG. 32 (a)) by an angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees> T13). Is rotated), the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is disposed at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward. This reaches the state (see FIG. 34 (a)). During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

  Here, the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotational direction of the dynamic crank member 570 is different, the rotational region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

  In this case, in the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A, the inner periphery of the deformed elongated hole 553 in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is obtained. While the surface is not in contact, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmission region), while the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. The driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area).

  Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. Thereby, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, two types of effects of the rotating arm member 550 can be formed.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32A and FIG. 34A, the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated, the rotating arm member 550 is oscillated by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating arm member 550 is swung at a speed depending on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 (transmission region).

  Thereby, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is constant, the rotation when the rotation crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase by reversing the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570. Variations in the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

  Further, the increase in the variation of the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin portion D), so that the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550. Other members such as a changeover switch for changing can be made unnecessary, and the member cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the margin portion D is formed on the pivot support hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, compared with the case where the margin portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotation shaft of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding projection portion 574 passes the margin portion D through a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the operation of the rotating arm member 550 remarkable when the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the margin portion D of the rotating crank member 570.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). ) And the sliding projection 574 is slid by the second non-transmission wall 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 34B, the sliding projection 574 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Pressed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the state of FIG.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) by an angle T16 (T16≈180 degrees> T15). When it is rotated), the sliding projection 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). ) And the sliding projection 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (See (b)). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  Here, when the rotation of the rotation crank member 570 and the swing of the rotation arm member 550 are always linked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550. . Therefore, when starting the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force overcoming the inertia of each member. For this reason, a driving device having a large driving force is required, which may increase the size of the driving device.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the starting timing of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the rotating crank member 570 is rotated until the state of FIG. 35 (a) is reached to the state of FIG. 35 (b). The rotating arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotating crank member 570.

  Thereby, since the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used for starting the rotating arm member 550, the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second drive device 560 can be reduced in size.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front in the state shown in FIG. 35B, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a and reaches the state shown in FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  For these reasons, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed in the clockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b becomes the reference in a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically upward from the horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The projection 541b is maintained at a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the projection 541b is vertical from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the subsequent rotation cycle. The position is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 upward to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially increased by the gravitational acceleration when moving downward, and on the other hand, when moving upward, the moving speed is always the same as the rotating speed of the rotating crank member 570. Is done. Thereby, the aspect of the speed change of the projection part 541b (extension / rendering effect apparatus 540) can be changed by the direction of movement of the projection part 541b (extension / rendering effect apparatus 540).

  With reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of a change in the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.

  FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis indicates the swing angle in such a manner that the upper-right orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating crank member 570 is the left end, and increases in the right direction from there. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is shown.

  In FIG. 36, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is indicated by a curve CC1, and the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is indicated by a curve CW1. The curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b from FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, respectively. For comparison when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by horizontally inverting the curve CC1 is shown as an imaginary line as a curve CC2. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, the ascending speed and the descending speed of the protrusion 541b moved up and down by the rotating arm member 550 are changed by reversing the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570. Can do.

  In addition, as a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, it rotates until the sliding protrusion 574 contacts the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28A). A case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by a broken line as a curve CW2. This corresponds to the case where the biasing force that causes the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) to swing the rotating arm member 550 upward is set large. In this case, the period during which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position can be further extended.

  In the curves CC1 and CW1, the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550 (in the angle range N1 in which the distance from the horizontal reference line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) is maintained unchanged. A non-transmission region in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between FIG. The width of the angle range N1 can be adjusted by the formation width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

  In addition, in the curve CW1, an angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) contacts the deformed long hole 553 (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating arm member 550. In the range N2, a non-transmission region where the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550. The width of the angle range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

  As shown in FIG. 36, a curve between the angle T11 to the angle T14 and the angle T4 to the angle T6, which are cases where the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) is arranged in the same phase. The shapes of CW1 and CC1 are different (curve CW1 and curve CC2 obtained by horizontally inverting curve CC1 do not overlap).

  That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) rotates in a manner of lifting the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) between the angle T4 and the angle T6, the angle is greater. Compared to the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a mode of pushing down the rotating arm member 550 between 11 and the angle T14, the curve becomes gentler.

  This is because, in the curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28A) abuts on the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). 28 (a)) is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding projection 574 abuts against the selection wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. By.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, in the deformed long hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the forming angle with the arc S1 is small). Thus, the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. The

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to cope with the change amount changes. That is, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other is as follows. The swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

  In FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described. However, the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 can be reversed halfway. As a timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall 553b (for example, FIG. 28A, FIG. 31 and FIG. 32A). 32B, the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite the second non-transmission wall 553c (for example, FIG. 29A). 29 (b), FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 35 (a), the rotating arm member 550 is preferably disposed at the extended position.

  In this case, since the rotation arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570, the resistance loaded from the rotation arm member 550 to the rotation crank member 570 when the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 is reversed is reduced. Can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position and the state where it is disposed at the extended position is disposed. It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 while the moving arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position.

  By reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, variations in the reciprocating motion of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction can be increased.

  For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by half a circle (see FIG. 29A), and then rotated. The case where the rotation arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position by reversing the direction of rotation of the dynamic crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by a half turn is illustrated (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding projection 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h1) from a position separated vertically by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. ) And move down to a position separated by a distance. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) in which the horizontal axis is 0 degrees to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b extends from a position separated vertically by a distance h3 from the reference horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and the predetermined distance (h1-h3). The same period can be used.

  Further, for example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 32A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn clockwise (see FIG. 34A). Next, the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by rotating counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). (See (a)). That is, the sliding projection 574 moves on the side close to the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3) from a position separated vertically by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move downward to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) in which the horizontal axis is 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up to position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis of 270 to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and is increased by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The moving period can be made the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In addition, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially dropped (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves upward. When doing so, it is always moved at a speed along the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 when the rotation crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase according to the movement direction of the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

  Next, the difference in swing angle due to the difference in the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state will be described.

  37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 37 to 39 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position). 37 shows a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 38, the protrusion 541 starts from the state of FIG. FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved in a clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 37. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state is formed in an arc shape centered on the first shaft portion 512, and is rotated. Along the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arc-shaped hole 554 extends along the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not disposed facing the swinging direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not function as a stopper for stopping the swinging of the protrusion 541b. Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the rotation of the rotating plate 520 is restricted. That is, the rotary plate 520 can swing until it contacts the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can swing counterclockwise to the swing angle θ1, and the rotary plate 520 is in the second position. The protrusion 541b can swing to the swing angle θ2 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, until it comes into contact with the stopper 518b.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left in the front view at a swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction production device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the projection 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 are provided with the turning arm member even when the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the turning arm member 550. By being arranged so as to be able to engage with 550, the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion / contraction effect device 540 from moving in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550.

  Thereby, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the defect that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning area | region of the rotation arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement | positioning area | region of another movable member can be ensured by that much. Further, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protruding portion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 is shifted, and the protruding portion 541b is circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding projection 574 abuts on the deformed elongated hole 553, thereby preventing the swing arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

  In addition, the movement trajectory of the point farthest from the rotation axis of the sliding protrusion 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that contacts the sliding protrusion 574. Therefore, the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotating arm member 550.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the overhanging position (FIG. )), The protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 until the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. think of. Even after the protrusion 541b has returned to the arcuate hole 554, even if the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated and the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. 30B, the protrusion 541b. Does not fail to return to the arcuate hole 554.

  In this case, when the rotation arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are respectively swung, the rotation crank member 570 is controlled to stop or start in accordance with the positional relationship between the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need, and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 can be continued. In other words, it is only necessary to control the swinging timing of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and the rotating crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and may be kept rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a control load of a complicated operation of swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the turning arm member 550 at different timings.

  In the present embodiment, a tip portion 554a is formed so that the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 is increased toward the opening end portion (left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554. Accordingly, it is possible to tolerate a large displacement (a displacement in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be secured.

  Next, the swing angle in the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state that is a state between the extended state and the reduced state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction production device 540 is in the extended state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise. Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

  40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 40 to 42 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed between the extended position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is in the extended state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  40 shows a state in which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 41, the protruding portion 541 is the front surface from the state of FIG. FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved in the clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 40.

  The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swinging arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state are the radius of curvature. Although the central axes of both coincide on the upper side, the radius of curvature and the posture are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the formation angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 serves as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). .

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is not in contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotary plate 520 can be swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise to the swing angle θ3 (angle θ3 = Angle θ1).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper side surface of the turning arm member 550, and the state change in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented. The movement is stopped.

  That is, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be swung clockwise to the swing angle θ4 (angle θ4 <angle θ2). . Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the swing angle of the expansion / contraction production | presentation apparatus 540 can be increased by making the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production | presentation apparatus 540 differ. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the reduced state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise, and the expansion / contraction effect is achieved. Device 540 creates a reduced state.

  43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 43 to 45 illustrate a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  43 shows a state in which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510. In FIG. 44, the protruding portion 541 starts from the state of FIG. FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise from the state of FIG. 43. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swinging arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a contracted state. The central axis of curvature radius is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arc-shaped hole 554 is disposed above the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at a formation angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arc-shaped hole 554 functions as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise to a swing angle θ5. (Angle θ5 <angle θ1 = angle θ3).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be swung clockwise to the swing angle θ6 (angle θ6 <angle θ4). <Angle θ2). Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the rocking | fluctuation width of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 540 can be increased.

  Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the reduced state is larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. The

  In the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung in a manner crossing the arc-shaped hole 554, and the protrusion 541b The rocking angle is minimized. On the other hand, if the formation angle is 0 degree (see FIGS. 37 to 39) in the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, the protrusion 541b extends along the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554. Thus, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the projection 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the projection 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2). ).

  As described above, by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed. At this time, the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 (the first stopper surface 554b, the second The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. Thereby, the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 can be used as a part for restricting the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a space for disposing a stopper that restricts the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

  In addition, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is provided on the front side of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 even if the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, other members can be disposed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, and therefore other movable members (for example, the slide operation unit 700). The overhanging space of the column member 720) can be secured.

  In addition, the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotation arm member 550 functions as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the second drive of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. And a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion / contraction production device 540 to perform expansion / contraction operation. As a result, the functions can be consolidated and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. The tilt operation unit 600 is a unit that swings the effect member 620 (tilt operation) (see FIG. 12), and the slide operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilt operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. 46 and 47, a state in which the column members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position is illustrated.

  48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is illustrated without being disassembled for easy understanding.

  The slide operation unit 700 is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with one end fastened and fixed to a base member 710 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction and the slide plate 711 of the base member 710. A column member 720, and a slide rail 730 in which one end portion is fastened and fixed to the column member 720 and the other end portion to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is extendable in the vertical direction; A connecting member 740 that is formed to be slidable on the back rail 716 of the main body 710 and is pivotally supported by the pivotal support 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a driving force for moving the column member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710.

  The base member 710 is a member that forms a skeleton of the slide operation unit 700. The base member 710 is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, the slide plate 711 to which the column member 720 is fastened and fixed from the back side, and the back view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 that is recessed in the lower left portion with a circular cross section and is supported by the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole that is recessed in the shape of a long hole extending in the left-right direction in the lower right portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the back. 712 and the slide shaft support hole 713 in which the moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and the solenoid 712 is swingable up and down by a solenoid, and the locking portion 725 of the column member 720 in the left-right direction. A lever member 714 that restricts the movement of the base member 710, and an upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 that rolls upward and protrudes in a cross-section downward arc shape toward the front side at the upper end of the base member 710. The front rail portion 715 mainly comprises a rear rail portion 716 through plate portion 741b is inserted in the recessed by the coupling member 740 from the rear arc-shaped cross section in a front rail portion 715, a.

  Since the lever member 714 regulates the sliding movement of the column member 720 that is fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711 in the left-right direction, the driving force of the driving device 750 is not required when the tilting operation unit 600 is maintained at the retracted position. Can do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the formation direction (arc trajectory) of the front rail portion 715 and the back rail portion 716, the right and left of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 The sliding movement in the direction can be caused by the action of gravity loaded on the tilting operation unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the moving direction of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left-right direction along the moving direction of the slide plate 711, the column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is swung downward to engage with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720 and the movement of the column member 720 in the left-right direction is restricted. Can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  The column member 720 includes a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape that is long in the vertical direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 that is provided in the left-right direction at the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and drilled in the front-rear direction. A first fastening portion 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and a second fastening in which the slide rail 730 is fastened and connected to the left end portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction and drilled in the front-rear direction. Part 723, a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening part 723 and formed on the right side of the main body 721 in the front view, and the right of the main body 721 A hook-shaped locking portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and meshes with the lever member 714, and a lower lid portion that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721 and the belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between the main body portion 721. 726 and main body 7 1, a rolling part 727 that protrudes from the rear side of the lower end part 1 and is formed to be able to roll on the inner peripheral surface of the slide recessed part 764 of the back cover member 760, and is suspended downward and forward from the upper end part of the main body part 721. And a coil spring 728 mainly connected to the flange-shaped portion 617 of the base member 610 at the lower end.

  The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support column member 720 in a posture capable of expanding and contracting in the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723.

  The slide hole 724 is a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the displacement of the tilting operation unit 600 that moves up and down in the left-right direction (the relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the column member 720).

  The lower lid portion 726 is formed with a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile is a shape that meshes with a tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the support member 720 from slipping with respect to the belt 755 of the driving device 750.

  The rolling part 727 is inserted into the slide recessed part 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing the frictional resistance and suppressing the inclination in the front-rear direction around the lower end part of the column member 720. be able to.

  The coil spring 728 is a biasing force that moves the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the urging force from the coil spring 728 is always applied to the tilting operation unit 600, the tilting operation unit 600 is suppressed from dropping downward due to gravity.

  The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 that is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a rolling shaft 741c that protrudes from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. The front cover member 743 arranged in a mode, and the lower half portion of the front cover member 743 disposed on the back side of the front cover member 743 are fitted and held on the front cover member 743, and the upper half portion rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. And a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 to be moved.

  The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and is a circular recess recessed from the back at the upper end, and is a shaft that is rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A support 741a, a plate-like member projecting to the front side at the lower end, an insertion plate 741b that is slidably inserted into the back rail 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate from the shaft support 741a It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c that project in a columnar shape from the position symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular drawn to 741b to the front side and on which the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

  Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted into the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 741a is also formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716.

  A pair of rolling shafts 741c are formed at positions symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c are brought into contact with the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, a load (from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 to the connecting member 740 ( Force in the normal direction of the arc) passes through the shaft support 741a. Therefore, the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stably held by the connecting member 740.

  The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741a and is in contact with the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

  The lower rolling member 744 is externally fitted to the lower portion of the front cover member 743 so that the lower half portion is rotatable, and the upper end portion is in contact with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 is rolled on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thereby, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 during the sliding movement can be reduced, and the driving force necessary for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls with the upper surface of the front rail portion 715, and the lower rolling member 744 rolls with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thereby, the state which pinched | interposed the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail part 715 with the upper side rolling member 742 and the lower side rolling member 744 of the connection member 740 can be maintained, suppressing a frictional resistance.

  Here, since the center of gravity is formed upward as described later, the tilting operation unit 600 may be tilted in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, the connecting member 740 is against the tilt in both the front and rear directions of the tilting operation unit 600. , Resistance can be generated. As a result, the posture of the tilting operation unit 600 can be easily maintained.

  The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740, thereby pivotally supporting the upper rolling member 742 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The driving device 750 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force for sliding the support member 720, a driving gear 752 pivotally supported by the driving motor 751, and a driving gear 752. A shaft fixed gear 753 around which the belt 755 is wound, and a shaft moving gear 754 which is disposed apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and is wound around the belt 755 so that the rotary shaft 754a is slidably movable. The belt 755 wound around the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753, and a coil that generates a biasing force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 away from the shaft fixed gear 753. And a spring 756.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 is a columnar member serving as a rotating shaft, and includes a fixed shaft portion 753 a that is inserted into the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710. The shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754 a that is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. On the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755, a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 is formed. Accordingly, slip between the belt 755 and the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the rotation amount of the shaft fixing gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

  One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a bowl-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710, and the other end is fixed to a case covering the shaft moving gear 754. . As a result, an urging force for moving the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 can be generated, and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755. Therefore, the belt 755 can move the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

  The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the driving device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and has a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened, and a fixed shaft portion 753 a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a recess for receiving, a moving recessed portion 763 that is extended in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and that receives a moving shaft portion 754a, and a rolling portion 727 that is extended in the left-right direction. And a slide concave portion 764 which is a depression.

  The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on the upper and lower inner surfaces. While suppressing the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the support | pillar member 720, it suppresses that the support | pillar member 720 inclines in the front-back direction. That is, when the column member 720 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 comes into contact with either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide recessed portion 764. Thereby, the inclination to the front-back direction of the support | pillar member 720 can be suppressed.

  Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-like base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, a box-like effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotally supported by the base member 610, A first driving device 630 that generates a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first drive device 630 to the effect member 620, and a contact member 640 for transmission. A torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force that moves the member 640 and a second driving device 660 that generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the rendering member 620 are mainly provided. .

  The base member 610 includes a main body 611 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape with the slide rail 730 fastened and fixed, and a shaft support portion of the connecting member 740 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the front side of the main body 611. The shaft support protrusion 612 on which the shaft 741a is supported, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the shaft support protrusion 612, and the swing shaft 626 of the effect member 620 are supported in a swingable manner. A first shaft support hole 613 and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted into the slide hole 724 of the column member 720 so as to be vertically slidable, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted 616 and the lower end of the main body 611 A hook-shaped hook portion 617 that extends toward the side, mainly comprising.

  The second shaft support hole 614 includes a lower receiving plate portion 614a that protrudes in a circular arc shape from the lower edge to the front side. The lower receiving plate portion 614a guides the rotation of the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed with a left-right width that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 642 (see FIG. 53A).

  Since the auxiliary member 615 is inserted through the slide hole 724, the inclination of the base member 610 in the left-right direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid in the up-down direction.

  The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

  With reference to FIG. 52, the production member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660. FIG. Note that the liquid crystal device disposed inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are referred to as appropriate for the description of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

  The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which the liquid crystal device is disposed, and has a rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and a mode in which the main body member 621 extends from the top to the front and covers the main body member 621. An upper and lower cover member 622 that is bent, a plate-like member that is attached from both side surfaces of the upper and lower cover member 622, and that forms a rectangular box shape with the upper and lower cover members 622 opened to the front; A first curtain member 624 that is connected to and moved by the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660, and a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624. A second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the curtain member 624, a column-shaped swinging shaft portion 626 that protrudes from the lower back of the main body member 621, Mainly it includes center of gravity G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the pivot shaft portion 626. The center-of-gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

  The main body member 621 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that protrudes on the back side vertically above the swing shaft portion 626. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

  The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside in a state where the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. .

  The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a that are formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and in which the slide protrusions 625c of the second curtain member 625 can slide.

  The slide groove 623a is connected to a curved groove formed in an arc shape at the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. Accordingly, the second curtain member 625 is slid and moved in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur in order along the shape of the slide groove 623a.

  The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings in the vertical direction about the opening / closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and a main body 624a having a shape in which a plate material is bent in a C-shaped section, and the main body A fitting portion 624b that protrudes in the left-right direction from the end portion of 624a and is fitted into the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 so as not to be relatively rotatable, and one end portion near the fitting portion 624b is a main body portion. And a connecting member 624c that is pivotally supported by 624 and whose other end is connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

  The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction. The main body 625a is formed in a plate shape having a C-shaped cross section, and the cross section of the main body 624a is C-shaped. A connecting protrusion 625b that protrudes in the left-right direction from the end and is connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left and right cover member 623 that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body 625a. And a slide protrusion 625c inserted through 623a.

  The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear that meshes with the drive gear 662. A pair of transmission gears 663 that rotate in opposite directions, and an opening / closing shaft that is inserted into the transmission gear 663 so as not to be relatively rotatable and is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by an unillustrated shaft support mechanism. 664 and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening and closing shafts 664 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is swung up and down around the opening / closing shaft 664.

  Returning to FIG. 50 and FIG. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is inserted into the insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. And a helical gear-shaped worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632.

  The worm 632 is formed by a double thread. In this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, the worm wheel 633 rotates once while the worm 632 rotates ten times. Thereby, the rotation angle of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution can be greatly reduced.

  The worm wheel 633 protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and has a locking protrusion 633a that is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Prepare. The transmission of the driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 is actively rotated, the force is 632 in the axial direction). Thereby, the load which the drive motor 631 receives when stopping the worm wheel 633 can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

  The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. To do. 53A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. In this state, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is applied to the transmission member 640. It is balanced in the swing direction. FIG. 53B shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the inverted state of FIG. 53A and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount.

  The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50). The transmission member 640 has a main body portion 641 that is formed in a long rectangular bar shape, and front and rear portions at one end portion of the main body portion 641. A cylindrical portion 642 that extends in the direction and engages with the locking projection 633a of the first drive device 630, and a length that extends in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the main body portion 641. The sliding hole 643 drilled as a hole, the contact part 644 spaced apart on both sides of the swinging direction of the main body part 641, and the contact part 644 and the front side surface of the main body part 641 are connected. And an arc-shaped front arc plate portion 645 having a wide width and an arc-shaped back arc plate portion 646 having an arc-shape having a width that connects the contact portion 644 and the rear side surface of the main body portion 641.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 are arranged so as to surround the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from dropping (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported in the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking protrusion 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to be relatively rotatable. The

  The sliding hole 643 is inserted through the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. Thus, when the transmission member 640 is swung around the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is obtained. Is slid about the first shaft support hole 613 while the effect member 620 is slid about the first shaft support hole 613.

  By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated in the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device can be suppressed. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the angle P0 of the minimum unit of the control resolution of the drive motor (see FIG. 53 (a)) is shown to be several times larger than the actual angle P0 for easy understanding. The amount of movement X1 that shifts the center of gravity of the effect member 620 from the inverted state to the left-right direction increases as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 moves away from the swinging shaft portion 626. Therefore, as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is further away from the swinging shaft portion 626, it becomes more difficult to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 620, so that the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is disposed directly above the swinging shaft portion 626. It is difficult to make the effect member 620 stationary in the state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is coupled to the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626 that is the swinging shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed shorter than

  Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53A) of the minimum unit of resolution of control of the driving device is easy to understand. Therefore, the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 when the drive device is operated at an angle that is several times larger than the actual angle P0 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed right above the first axis.

  Further, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, gear teeth are formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 is conceivable. However, in this case, the greater the swing range of the effect member 620, the greater the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect of the effect. Therefore, the design freedom of the effect member 620 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is the swing shaft portion 626 in which the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swing shaft is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. And is connected to the swinging shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Thereby, even if the production member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, the transmission member 640 can be prevented from protruding from the production member 620, and the degree of freedom in design of the production member 620 can be improved.

  The lower surface of the slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640. Thereby, the weight of the effect member 620 is loaded not only on the swinging shaft portion 626 but also on the transmission member 640. That is, a force that opposes the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the rocking shaft portion 626 but also from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points of the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. .

  Here, since the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A is the normal state, the effect member 620 can be quickly returned to the inverted state after the transmission member 640 is swung and swung a predetermined amount from the inverted state. Is desirable.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 53 (a) at a swing angle φ1, the effect member 620 is produced. Is rocked at a rocking angle φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

  That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that is swung by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

  In the present embodiment, a long-sliding slide hole 643 is formed in the axial diameter direction of the transmission member 640, and the slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the slide hole 643. The transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 have different swing axes, and the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. As the shaft is swung, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the rocking shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( 54 (b)), the arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is shortened.

  That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state, and the arm length of the transmission member 640 is constant when the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle. As compared with the case of, it can be made smaller as the inverted state is approached. Therefore, without changing the rotation speed of the drive motor 631, the operating speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It is possible to make it easy to stand still in the state (it is possible to easily stop and control the effect member 620 in a state where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is disposed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

  Referring to FIG. 55, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). 55, the rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53A) that is the rotation shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotation shaft M2 is the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53A). The straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission member 640, are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2, the straight line a1 passes through the rotation axis M1, and the straight lines a2 to a4 are the straight line a1. Are formed in such a manner that the forming angles are sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angle formed by adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 is 15 degrees.

  An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53A) around the rotation axis M2 is shown as an arc SR1, and the arm length R2 around the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54B) An arc drawn with a radius equal to is shown as arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn with the rotation axis M1 as the center, and is an arc having a radius of a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

  These arcs assume the locus of the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). In the present embodiment, a sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53 (a)) as a connection position protrudes from the effect member 620, and the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . In addition, when the connection position of the production member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, the production member 620 is formed with an elongated slot in the axial direction, and the transmission member 640 A case where a shaft inserted through the long hole is projected is assumed.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is shown by the intersection point P10, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is shown by the intersection point P11, and the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is the intersection point P12. Is illustrated.

  Similarly, an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P20, an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P21, and an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P22. An intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P30, an intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P31, and an intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P32. An intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P40, an intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P41, and an intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P42. The intersection point P10 and the intersection point P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection point P40 and the intersection point P42 are arranged at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 55, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 is shown as an angle A10, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P11. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 is shown as an angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is shown as an angle A12. Is done.

  Similarly, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 is shown as an angle A20, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21, the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 is illustrated by an angle A21, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 is illustrated by an angle A22. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40 is shown as an angle A30, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P41. Are formed as an angle A31, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42 is shown as an angle A32. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angle of the effect member 620.

  Here, the ratio of (distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the effect member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0. When the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR2, the above is formed (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

  The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. This is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

  The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. It exceeds the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

  From these, by setting the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) as the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. In other words, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 approaches the angular velocity (high speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is on the straight line a1. When arranged, the angular velocity can approach the angular velocity (low speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR1.

  Further, when the ratio of the respective angles is calculated, the angle A22 / angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

  On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the coupling position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be 3 to 5%. That is, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the locus of the connection position is the arcs SR1 and SR2 (arcs centered on the rotation axis M2).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is brought into contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force due to the gravity G of the effect member 620 is the swing shaft. It is hung vertically downward with respect to the part 626 and the cylindrical part 642. Therefore, since the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated by the gravity of the effect member 620, the posture of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state even when the power of the first drive device 630 is shut off. Can do. Thereby, durability improvement of the 1st drive device 630 can be aimed at.

  Further, since the force due to the gravity G of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. Further, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

  The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring in which an urging force is generated in a direction in which the coil portion 651 is rewound (a direction in which the transmission member 640 is pushed back) as the transmission member 640 swings. A coil portion 651 wound around, an urging arm portion 652 extending along both sides of the swinging direction of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640, an end portion of the coil portion 651, and an end portion of the urging arm portion 652 And a connecting arm portion 653 that connects the portion between the cylindrical portion 642 and the swinging shaft portion 626.

  The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung to cause a load to reduce the diameter of the coil portion 651, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 are deformed. Can be prevented from concentrating.

  The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the abutting portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the urging arm portion 652 from dropping (detaching) from the transmission member 640.

  Further, the urging arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 disposed in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion disposed on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640. 652 is prevented from moving to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. Thereby, the torsion spring 650 is formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in a direction to push back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640.

  A bent portion 653 a that is bent to the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653. In this case, as described later, the bent portion 653a is expanded by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 being pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 (see FIG. 54B). Thereby, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes far from the cylindrical portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can do.

  With reference to FIG. 54, the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. FIGS. 54A and 54B are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

  Further, in FIG. 54A, from the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front is the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the inner surface starts to be pressed. In FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. The extended state is illustrated.

  In the state of FIG. 54A, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This urging force is the sum of the urging force generated from the coil portion 651 and the urging force generated from the bent portion 653a.

  That is, in the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bent portion 653a arranged on the left side in the front view among the pair of bent portions 653a. Only a biasing force starting from the coil portion 651 is generated in the portion 652 as a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54A, in addition to the urging force starting from the coil portion 651, the urging force is generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a. Therefore, the spring constant of the urging arm portion 652 can be increased. Note that the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so the length of the portion subjected to the deformation is shortened. The urging force generated by the hit can be further increased.

  In the state of FIG. 54 (b), the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is expanded by pushing the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. Accordingly, the contact position length L1 which is the distance between the contact position of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical portion 642 in the state of FIG. Compared to FIG. 54B, the similar contact position length L <b> 2 in the state of FIG. 54B is separated from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. Thereby, since the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is increased, the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, when the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same in the state of FIG. 54A and the state of FIG. 54B, the load on the transmission member 640 is further increased in FIG. The moment that is generated can be increased. Therefore, the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 can be more easily pushed back.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is small when the swing angle from the retracted position of the transmission member 640 (the production member 620) is small, and the swing angle is large. As it is, it is increased elastically, and is increased beyond the elastic increase with the state of FIG. For this reason, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is at the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring only increases elastically. Compared to the above, the biasing force when the swing angle is small can be set smaller (a soft spring can be used).

  Thereby, the degree to which the operation speed at the start of the swing of the effect member 620 is decelerated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be reduced, and the operation speed at the start of the operation of the effect member 620 can be increased. .

  Further, since the urging force is increased beyond the elastic increase with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is equal to or greater than the state of FIG. 54 (a). The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to delay the timing at which the effect member 620 starts to decelerate during the swinging motion of the effect member 620. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung in a high speed state can be expanded, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. In FIG. 56, the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the connecting member 740 that connects the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 that are slidably movable in the vertical direction is formed to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting operation unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is left in front view along the front rail portion 715 due to gravity. Is biased towards. Therefore, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750 in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be able to swing up and down, and when the lever member 714 is swinged downward, the lever member 714 is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720 and Slide movement in the direction is restricted.

  As a result, the tilting operation unit 600 can be mechanically maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is stopped with the drive device 750 stopped. It can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  From the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved by swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the driving device 750, and the tilting operation unit 600 can be moved in the horizontal direction. Can be moved to slide.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the retracted position in an inverted state, the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is placed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Here, since the direction of sliding movement of the tilting operation unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. 56, the tilting operation unit 600 moves while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see the imaginary line in FIG. 56). Always has a vertical component.

  Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are displaced in the vertical direction, a load may be applied in the direction in which the tilting operation unit 600 is rotated from the connecting member 740. This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the reverse direction.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied to the tilting operation unit 600 from the connecting member 740 and the center of gravity G are It is formed on the same line. Thereby, it can suppress that a load is applied to the direction which rotates the tilting operation unit 600 from the connection member 740, and the attitude | position of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the slide motion of the slide motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. FIG. 57 shows a state where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed on the left side of the front view of the connection member 740 in a state where the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Therefore, the acceleration in the leftward direction when viewed from the front, which is applied to the connecting member 740, is increased.

  In this case, since the driving force necessary for sliding the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be reduced in size.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, a tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface has been described, but the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 2640. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that comes into contact with the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  58 (a), 58 (b), and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58A, 58B, and 59, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 58A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 58A. The transmission member 2640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the bottom surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front is illustrated from the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58A), the main body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 2641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is deformed to be reduced in diameter by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force that swings the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the urging arm portion 652 (from the difference in the swing angle between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640 ( The tip position of the urging arm 652 is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 2640. That is, as the transmission member 2640 is swung, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 is moved to the distal end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 58B, when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in a state where the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 642. The urging arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung while the movement of the attached arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the urging arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

  That is, as compared with the case where the abutting portion 2641a is not provided, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 59 can be increased. Thereby, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the increasing ratio of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. Can do. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed, and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased while the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59). The biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be increased nonlinearly (more than an elastic change), and a biasing force sufficient to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state can be obtained.

  Next, a tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 3640. 3641 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a that is inclined in such a manner that the side surface comes into contact with the tip of the torsion spring 650 and becomes wider as it approaches the tip. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 60A and 60B are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. In FIGS. 60A and 60B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 60A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 60A. A state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

  When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60A to the state shown in FIG. 60B, the difference in the swing angle between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 is caused. The contact position between the main body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 3640. That is, as the swing angle from the inverted state of the transmission member 3640 (see FIG. 60A) increases, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 moves toward the distal end side of the main body portion 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ).

  Therefore, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body portion 3641. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 is deformed by the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. . In this case, since the width of the transmission member 3640 is further increased toward the distal end portion of the transmission member 3640, the inclined side surface 3641a increases as the swing angle from the inverted state of the transmission member 3640 (see FIG. 60A) increases. As a result, the deformation of the torsion spring 650 is increased by increasing the width of the transmission member 3640. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the increase rate of the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, a tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. However, in the tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 is added to the contact portion 644 and the contact portion 644 thereof. A moving contact member 4647 having a shorter width than the portion 644 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  61A is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61B is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member 4647. FIG. In FIG. 61A, illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front circular arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a that are arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact portions 644 and drilled in the front-rear direction. Prepare. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear protrusions 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear surface protrusions projecting from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the back surface side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front protrusion 4647c protruding in a hemispherical shape from the approximate center of the main body portion 4647 to the front side.

  One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front projection 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (see FIG. 62 (c) and FIG. 62 (d)). For easy understanding, the coil spring 4648 is not shown in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a), and 62 (b).

  The rear protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted from the front side into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640, and has a sufficient length from the front arc plate portion 4645 (when it contacts with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650). (Possible length) is formed in a protruding manner. The back projection 4647b is formed to be inclined at an angle that makes contact with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 at the surface (line) (see FIG. 64B). As a result, the load applied to the urging arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the urging arm 652 and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the urging arm 652 is reduced. The durability of can be improved.

  The front protrusion 4647c is a portion that comes into contact with the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 is in a relationship with the escape opening 4621a formed in the main body member 4621. The front arc plate 4645 is separated (see FIG. 62C), or the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the front arc plate 4645 (see FIG. 62D). In addition, since the front-end | tip of the front projection part 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, it can make it easy to get the front projection part 4647c on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. FIG. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is the moving contact member in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (d). The state where 4647 is brought close to the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is illustrated.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view schematically showing the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620. Note that the transmission member 4640 that forms an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is a center state 4640C, the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is a counterclockwise rocking state 4640L, and the transmission member 4640 is The state of being swung in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is illustrated as an imaginary line as a clockwise wobbling state 4640R. Further, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clock swing state 4640R, the illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. .

  The main body member 4621 includes a relief opening 4621a formed in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the relief opening 4621a has a region (a central state 4640C and a counterclockwise swing) where the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the moving state 4640L).

  When the front projection 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in front view, the front projection 4647c is inserted into the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is transmitted by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648. Of the main body 641 (see FIG. 62C). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlap with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c comes into contact with the side surface on the back side of the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62D).

  That is, the rear protrusion 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the front side. It is. Therefore, the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated when the transmission member 4640 is swung in the clockwise direction from the inverted state as compared with the case of being swung counterclockwise in the front view. The increase rate of the urging force (the degree of increase of the urging force with respect to the swing angle) can be increased.

  FIGS. 64A and 64B are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is easy to understand. Illustration is omitted. 64A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 64A. The transmission member 4640 is swung by a predetermined amount clockwise in front view, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view is in contact with the rear projection 4647b.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swinging angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, the biasing arm portion 652 can be contacted from the opposite side (the contact portion 644 side) of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640. Thus, the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in front view can be increased.

  Thus, the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front is improved while the starting speed is increased when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Can do. Therefore, the production member 4620 can be prevented from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

  That is, in the state where the tilting operation unit 4600 is disposed at the retracted position, when the effect member 4620 is turned upside down, the inner surface of the back case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the effect member 4620 is vibrated vigorously from the state of being counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 57) toward the inverted state, the effect member 4620 cannot be fully decelerated, and the rear case 210. There is a risk of the production member 4620 colliding with the inner surface of the.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back projection 4647b protrudes at the timing when the effect member 4620 swings clockwise from the inverted state (see FIG. 62D), and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is sufficiently used when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the inverted state while maintaining the operation speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise from the inverted state. Can be slowed down.

  Also, the direction in which the rear protrusion 4647b is pushed back at the contact point between the rear protrusion 4647b and the biasing arm 652 disposed on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 4640 (FIG. 64 (b) front view counterclockwise). ) Is energized. As a result, the transmission member 4640 is moved with a larger urging force than when the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (right side in FIG. 64B). Can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is possible to improve the urging force generated by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the abutting portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the opposite side of the side close to the transmission member 4640 to the lower receiving plate portion 614a is located. As compared with the above, the distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is short. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a with the force from the contact portion 644 using the lower receiving plate portion 614 as a fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (the difference in the distance from the fulcrum to the action point is different). Because there is).

  Therefore, the urging force generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front when the abutting portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 are abutted is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other so that the bent portion 653a on the left side when viewed from the front is the left side when viewed from the front (the inner diameter of the coil portion 651). The deformation that is moved in the direction of narrowing) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the urging arm portion 652 on the right side of the front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 undergoes deformation whose inner diameter is reduced, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 to increase the inner diameter of the coil portion 651, and the right side view (transmission member) The urging force of the urging arm 652 on the side of the swinging direction of 4640 pushes back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

  Next, the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

  In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle around the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, the rotating arm member 5550 in the fifth embodiment includes the recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553c is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  65 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 65, the state where the rotating arm member 5550 is disposed at the extended position and the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated in FIG. 65, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. 67, however, the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 66 until the sliding projection 574 is disengaged from the recessed portion 5556 is shown in FIG. The state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the two concave portions 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated. The

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the combined operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 that is recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570.

  The recessed portion 5556 includes a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (about ¼ of a circular shape) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and an arc shape (about ¼ of the circular shape) formed on the right side when viewed from the front. The second wall portion 5556b of the rotating crank member 570 is configured to be slidable. That is, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is equal to or less than the radius of the sliding projection 574, and the connecting portion of the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is smooth. It is formed from a curved surface.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it is brought into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, between the state shown in FIG. 65 and the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding projection 574 has a first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. The rotating arm member 5550 is again swung to the extended position (pressed down) by being pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556. That is, during the period from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding projection 574, so that the rotating arm member 5550 is swung. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

  Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the second wall 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it is brought into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, between the state shown in FIG. 67 and the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in the state where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, When a non-transmission state is formed between the moving crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member A transmission state is formed with 5550.

  If the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are disposed when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the first wall 5556a. When the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the second wall 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550. The

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is moved between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swinging direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion that swings between, the rotating arm member 5550 has a small width in the vicinity of the overhang position (the mode in which the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the position U1 and the position U2). A swinging motion that is swung can be formed.

  Thus, the swing arm member 5550 can generate a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560. That is, it is possible to form the swing arm member 5550 with a small swinging motion near the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swinging operation depends on the switching speed of the driving direction of the driving device 560. Further, even if the driving direction of the driving device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the driving device 560 and the rotating arm member 5550 is large and the driving direction cannot be switched instantaneously. There is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes longer.

  On the other hand, in the swinging operation in the vicinity of the extended position of the rotating arm member 5550 in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so that the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

  Further, the operation speed of the operation of swinging the rotating arm member 5550 in the clockwise direction (upward swinging operation) depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the rotating arm member 5550 is bent in the front view. The operation speed of the clockwise swing operation (downward swing operation) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the urging force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swing speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the overhang position can be increased.

  Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both speeding up of the swinging operation in the vicinity of the protruding position of the rotating arm member 5550 and shortening of the switching time of the swinging direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 71, a combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the turning arm member 550 of the combined operation unit 500 is integrally formed has been described. However, the turning arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . By relatively swinging the two members, the posture of the arc-shaped hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  69 (a) and 69 (c) are partial front views of the turning arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) shows the turning in the direction of the arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial top view of the arm member 6550. 69A illustrates a state in which a first posture is formed in which the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is directed upward, and in FIG. 69B, the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is downward. The state in which the oriented second posture is formed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end portion of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip swing member 6556 and a switching device 6590 that is fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body portion 6551 and switches the posture of the tip swing member 6556. An arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swinging member 6556.

  The main body portion 6551 is provided with a shaft support hole 6551a which is formed in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and serves as the swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

  The distal end swinging member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front and rear, and a shaft support hole 6556a drilled as the swing center of the distal end swinging member 6556. The shaft support hole 6556a and a shaft support bar 6556b which is a bar member inserted into the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swinging member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arcuate hole 6554. And a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the portion and is connected to the guide long hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

  The arc-shaped hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a that protrudes from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that is slid by the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540, and when sliding from the tip end side of the arc-shaped hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, but sliding is performed in the opposite direction. When it is moved, it is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion whose sliding resistance is increased.

  70A and 70B are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (a).

  The C-shaped member 6591 has an elongated plate-like main body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the movable cylindrical portion 6592a can be inserted is formed in the center, and the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the hole formed in the main body portion 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has a groove formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and extends downward from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6591a and is opposed to the front and rear direction of the main body portion 6551. A pair of arm portions 6591c, and a guide long hole 6591d that is a long hole that is drilled on the tip side of the arm portion 6591c and guides the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556.

  The groove processing formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591b is groove processing for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. The C-shaped member 6591 is switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state each time the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed in the direction in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed against the switch member 6592. In addition, illustration of other members, such as a spring member which forms urging | biasing force required in order to form a knock mechanism, is abbreviate | omitted, and in this embodiment, the cylindrical guide part 6591b is the pushing part 6541a (FIG. 71).

  The switch member 6592 includes a moving column portion 6592a that is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 6591a and has a protrusion that can move through the groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591a, and the movable column portion 6592a is a shaft. And a fixed plate portion 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550.

  Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative positions in the axial direction are switched while the cylindrical member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical member are relatively rotated. That is, when the cylindrical member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it is difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

  On the other hand, the movable cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b so as to be rotatable. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in the direction close to the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70 (a)), the movable column portion 6592a can rotate relative to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. And the knock mechanism functions.

  Therefore, it is possible to switch between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Accordingly, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state while the state where the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 is inserted through the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591 is maintained. it can.

  71 (a) and 71 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. FIG. 71A shows a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up. In FIG. K4, the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position and switched. The device 6590 is shown in a depressed state. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is disposed at a position that is swung to the left end of the swingable range.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the front view clock of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is obtained by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position. The maximum swing angle can be switched.

  That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-up state (see FIG. 71A), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554, and The swing angle is limited.

  At this position, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper, and even when the swinging speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. It is possible to stop suddenly (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b is in contact with the return portion 6554a).

  On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-down state (see FIG. 71 (b)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b). The movement locus RI is not in contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect production device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the projection 541b is discharged to the outside from the tip portion 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

  Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front until the rotating plate 520 comes into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be stopped suddenly even when the swing effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high.

  Thereby, a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) can be formed when the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in front view and the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. The variation of can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 is switched by the telescopic effect member 6540 being swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the cylindrical guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 is moved from the upper right portion when viewed from the front of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by the pushing portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, since the second drive device 560 that causes the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as a drive device that swings the tip swing member 6556, the number of drive devices disposed can be reduced.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, the change can be made difficult for the player to notice.

  Here, when the turning arm member 6550 is visible to the player (see FIG. 71), if the swing angle of the telescopic effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the turning arm member 6550, The feeling of expectation for the operation of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 is reduced, and the degree of attention of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 is reduced.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the angle at which the tip swing member 6556 is swung to change the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is small, and it may be difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. Thereby, the expectation to the operation | movement of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 6540 can be raised, and the attention degree of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 6540 can be improved.

  Next, a tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the long hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guided is described. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the embodiment, a shaft support hole 7643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is supported by the shaft support hole 7643. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  72 (a) and 72 (b) are front views of the tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. 72A illustrates an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7743 of the transmission member 7640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. FIG. 72B illustrates an inverted state from FIG. 72B. A state where the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the outer shape of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. In addition, the torsion spring 650 and the shaft support protrusion 612 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 72A, the base member 7610 includes a sliding hole 7613 formed in the front-rear direction, vertically below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body 611. The sliding hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the long hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is supported by the slide hole 7613 so as to be slidable.

  The transmission member 7640 is provided with a shaft support hole 7643 at the end opposite to the end where the cylindrical portion 642 of the main body portion 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that pivotally supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

  The swinging motion of the effect member 620 occurs when the transmission member 7640 swings around the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

  In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (The sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the slide hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

  Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72B, when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72 <transmission swing). Moving angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631, the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 7640. Thereby, the precision of the adjustment of the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

  A connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. 72B is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and the swinging shaft part 626 is disposed above the sliding hole 7613 from a line drawn through the cylindrical part 642 in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 641. This is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 of FIG. 72 (a). The virtual angle φ73 that is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2 is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the effect swing angle φ72 is smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. Accuracy can be improved.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 80. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the electric accessory 640a and the second winning opening 640b are arranged directly below the through gate 67 and the sphere flows smoothly has been described, but the flow path forming unit 8800 in the eighth embodiment is A direction changing portion 8826 that intentionally creates a direction in which the sphere easily flows down is provided between the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the description of the present embodiment, FIG.

  FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the flow path forming unit 8800 in the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 73, the covering plate member 8820 is illustrated on the left side in a posture in which the back surface is directed toward the front side, and the base plate member 8810 is illustrated in a posture on the right side in which the front surface is directed toward the near side.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the flow path forming unit 8800 is a unit disposed in the lower right part of the game area (the area where the vertical wall portion 73b and the inclined wall portion 73c intersect, see FIG. 2). A plate-like base plate member 8810 fastened and fixed to the board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a plate member disposed at a predetermined distance from the front side of the base plate member 8810 and raised to the back side And a covering plate member 8820 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate member 8810 at a portion.

  The base plate member 8810 has a plate-like main body member 8811 in which the through gate 67 is disposed at the upper end portion, and the electric accessory 640a and the second winning port 640b are sequentially disposed below the through gate 67, the through gate 67, and the electric plate. And a recessed portion 8812 that is recessed from the front side wall surface of the main body member 8811 toward the rear surface side between the accessory 640a.

  The cover plate member 8820 is formed in a plate-like body member 8821 disposed at a predetermined distance on the front side of the body member 8811 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), and is raised from the body member 8821 to the back side. A plurality of raised portions 8822, 8823, 8824, and 8825, and a direction changing portion 8826 including a plurality of protrusions disposed on the front side of the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810 in the assembled state (see FIG. 3). .

  The plurality of raised portions are composed of a first raised portion 8822, a second raised portion 8823, a third raised portion 8824, and a fourth raised portion 8825, each having the same length (more than the diameter of the game ball). By being raised by the length (length), in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), a flow path is formed in which a sphere can flow down in the portion surrounded by the raised portions 8822, 8823, 8824, 8825 and the body members 8811, 8821.

  The first raised portion 8822 is inclined downward from the accommodation portion 8822a that is a portion that accommodates the through gate 67 and the right side surface (left side surface in FIG. 73) of the accommodation portion 8822a to the right side (left side in FIG. 73). And an inclined surface portion 8822b formed at the lower end portion of the housing portion 8822a and a curved wall portion 8822c extending from the left side (right side in FIG. 73) as viewed from the front.

  With such a configuration, the game ball flowing down the upstream side of the first raised portion 8822 is distributed in the flow-down route depending on whether it passes through the through gate 67 or rolls on the inclined surface portion 8822b (see FIG. 76).

  The second raised portion 8823 is a ball that rolls on the inclined surface portion 8822b at a position moved from the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a to the right in the front view (leftward in FIG. 73) by a predetermined distance. Is disposed at a position where the head falls, and the upper side surface is inclined downward toward the left side of the front view (right side of FIG. 73) and crosses the locking portion 8825c to the left side of the front view (right side of the rear view). It extends to the position.

  The third raised portion 8824 is spaced a predetermined distance vertically below the left side surface in front view (the right side surface in FIG. 73) of the housing portion 8822a, and at a position where at least the gap between the lower end of the curved wall portion 8822c is greater than the diameter of the sphere. Be placed.

  The fourth raised portion 8825 is configured in such a manner that the upper side surface is inclined downward toward the left in the front view (right side in FIG. 73), and is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with the lower side when the electric accessory 640a protrudes. An abutting wall surface 8825a, a rolling wall surface 8825b that is offset upward from the abutting wall surface 8825a with a slight gap from the right side end portion (right side end portion in FIG. 73) of the electric accessory 640a, and its rolling A locking portion 8825c extending upward from the right end (left end in FIG. 73) of the wall surface 8825b as viewed from the front, a pair of flow wall surfaces 8825d extending downward from the middle portion of the contact wall surface 8825a, Is provided.

  The locking portion 8825c is a part for preventing the ball rolling on the rolling wall surface 8825b from flowing into the discharge port 8825c1 that guides the ball to the second out port 315 (see FIG. 2). The extension length is approximately 1/3 of the diameter.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is normally in a closed state (a state in which it protrudes forward, see FIG. 73), but is in an open state when a ball passes through the through gate 67. It is comprised in the aspect which can be made into (the state retracted | saved back). For this reason, the flow path that passes through the through gate 67 is more advantageous to the player than the flow path that does not pass through the through gate 67 (for example, the flow path that rolls on the inclined surface portion 8822b). ).

  Conventionally, when the electric accessory 640a and the second winning opening 640b are disposed in the region below the through gate 67, a path of the sphere is changed by planting a nail below the through gate 67, The balls are adjusted to flow down to the electric winning combination 640a and the second winning opening 640b, and the other balls are adjusted to flow down avoiding the electric winning combination 640a and the second winning opening 640b. Therefore, there is a problem that the space for arranging the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a, and the second winning port 640b is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the entire configuration is downsized by configuring the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a, and the second winning opening 640b as a unit (integrated with the base plate member 8810). Thereby, the design freedom of the other game area of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Moreover, it can suppress that the relative positional relationship of the through gate 67, the electrically-driven accessory 640a, and the direction change part 8826 changes by comprising as 1 unit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down along a route different from the design intention by changing the relative positional relationship between the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640 a, and the direction changing portion 8826.

  Here, the smaller the size (the shorter the distance between the through gate 67 and the electric utility 640a), the easier it is for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to flow down to the electric utility 640a and to plant nails. Since this is not possible, a new problem has arisen that the profit given to the player may become too large. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the direction change part 8826 is arrange | positioned by the covering board member 8820, and the flow direction of the sphere which collided with the direction change part 8826 is branched into several types, and it is to the electrically-driven object 640a. The ratio of the spheres flowing down is reduced in advance.

  The configuration of the direction change unit 8826 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d). 74 (a) is a front view of the direction changing portion 8826, and FIG. 74 (b) is a top view of the direction changing portion 8826 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a). FIG. 74A is a side view of the direction changing portion 8826 in the direction of the arrow LXXIVc in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74D is a side view of the direction changing portion 8826 in the direction of the arrow LXXIVd in FIG. . In FIG. 74 (a), the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 is not shown, and the main body member 8821 is partially seen in cross section in FIGS. 74 (b) to 74 (d). 74 (a) to 74 (d), the outer shape of the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the direction changing portion 8826 is raised from the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 to the back side (back side in FIG. 74 (a)) and extends in the vertical direction. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) protruding portions 8826a, 8826b, 8826c, and 8826d are provided.

  The projecting portion is a trapezoidal portion whose upper base is shorter than the lower base in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 74 (c) or 74 (d)), and is a front view (see FIG. 74 (a)). ), The upper side is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the right as viewed from the front, and the lower side is formed in a shape along the inclination of the fourth raised portion 8825 (see FIG. 73). A protruding portion 8826a, a second protruding portion 8826b, a third protruding portion 8826c, and a fourth protruding portion 8826d are provided.

  The first projecting portion 8826a has a projecting height shorter than that of the adjacent second projecting portion 8826b (about half), and an inclined side surface 8826a1 formed as a left side surface when viewed from the front is about 45. Inclined at an angle of degrees (see FIG. 74 (b)) and slightly curved leftward as viewed from the front. Therefore, the speed in the left-right direction of the sphere flowing down from the left side of the first protruding portion 8826a in the front view can be changed to the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 74 (a)) (the speed in the left-right direction is reduced). In addition, the downward flow of the sphere can be easily directed in the direction in which the first protruding portion 8826a is curved.

  The second projecting portion 8826b and the third projecting portion 8826c have a projecting height that is approximately twice the projecting height of the first projecting portion 8826a, and face each other so that the surfaces are inclined to face each other. Inclined side surfaces 8826b1 and 8826c1 are provided, and are arranged in such a manner that the distance between them increases toward the bottom. Therefore, by causing the spheres that have flowed down to the upper half of the second convex portion 8826b and the third convex portion 8826c to collide with the facing inclined side surfaces 8826b1 and 8826c1, the second convex portion 8826b and the third convex portion 8826c The spheres can be easily maintained between them, and the spheres that have flowed down to the lower half of the second protruding portion 8826b and the third protruding portion 8826c contact the second protruding portion 8826b and the third protruding portion 8826c. It is possible to suppress discharge in the left-right direction (FIG. 74 (a) left-right direction) while in contact.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the sphere flowing down between the second convex portion 8826b and the third convex portion 8826c is a side surface opposite to the second convex portion 8826b and the third convex portion 8826c. The movement in the left-right direction (FIG. 74 (b) left-right direction) is suppressed by being hooked by the edge part. That is, the second projecting portion 8826b and the third projecting portion 8826c are spaced apart to the extent that a sphere can be hooked.

  The fourth protruding portion 8826d has a protruding height equivalent to that of the first protruding portion 8826a, and the inclined side surface 8826d1 formed as the right side surface in front view is inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees (FIG. 74B). reference). Therefore, the speed in the left-right direction of the sphere flowing down from the front right side of the first projecting portion 8826a can be changed to the front-rear direction (FIG. 74 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface).

  Referring to FIG. 75, the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810 will be described. 75 (a) is a front view of the recessed portion 8812 illustrating only the recessed portion 8812 in the base plate member 8810, and FIG. 75 (b) is taken along line LXXVb-LXXVb in FIG. 75 (a). It is sectional drawing of the recessed part 8812, FIG.75 (c) is sectional drawing of the recessed part 8812 in the LXXVc-LXXVc line | wire of Fig.75 (a). 75 (b) and 75 (c), the main body member 8811 of the base plate member 8810 is partially illustrated, and in FIG. 75 (b), the outline of the direction changing portion 8826 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The

  As shown in FIG. 75, the recessed portion 8812 is inclined in such a manner that the cross-sectional area of the recessed section decreases as the outer periphery thereof goes in the recessed direction (FIG. 75 (a) depth direction on the paper surface). In a front view, the direction change portion 8826 is disposed along the outer peripheral shape of the direction change portion 8826. That is, the ball that has collided with the outer peripheral portion of the direction change portion 8826 (see FIG. 73) and bounced back and forth collides with the inside of the recessed portion 8812.

  The recessed portion 8812 is configured in a shape that is different from the shape (see FIG. 75 (b)) seen in a cross section in a plane extending in the vertical direction and the shape (see FIG. 75 (c)) seen in a cross section in a plane extending in the horizontal direction. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the shape of the recessed portion 8812 as viewed in a cross section in a plane extending in the longitudinal direction is formed of a curved shape formed by arcs having different radii of curvature on the upper side and the lower side. That is, the upper arc portion 8812a disposed opposite to the upper inclined surface of the direction changing portion 8826 is formed in an arc shape having a first radius of curvature 8812r, and extends downward from the lower end portion of the upper arc portion 8812a. The side arc portion 8812b is formed in an arc shape having a second curvature radius 8812R. Here, the first curvature radius 8812r is shorter than the second curvature radius 8812R (8812r <8812R). The first radius of curvature 8812r has a length equivalent to the depth of the deepest portion of the recessed portion 8812.

  Therefore, the direction in which the sphere rebounds for each collision position of the sphere in the front-rear direction of the recessed portion 8812 can be directed in an advantageous direction. That is, since the upper arc portion 8812a is an arc formed over a central angle of 90 degrees, the velocity of the sphere that collided with the recess portion 8812 near the front side of the recess portion 8812 (right side in FIG. 75 (b)) is lowered. It is possible to change the direction of the sphere that has collided with the recessed portion 8812 near the back side of the recessed portion 8812 (on the left side in FIG. 75 (b)) while maintaining a large speed in the front-rear direction. .

  This prevents the ball that has collided with the upper arc portion 8812a from bouncing back and colliding with the inclined portion on the upper side of the direction changing portion 8826 again, and at a position where there is less fear of recollising with the direction changing portion 8826 (recessed portion). The ball that collides with the upper arc portion 8812a at a position below 8812 bounces back toward the front, whereby the flow of the sphere can be prevented from stagnation (the flow of the sphere can be made smooth). ).

  That is, with a one-way channel such as a warp channel, it is possible to easily realize the flow down without interfering with each other even when the balls flow down in series while decelerating the balls. On the other hand, if the spheres are decelerated in a region where the spheres can flow freely instead of a single road as in this embodiment, the spheres easily interfere with each other, and smooth sphere flow is likely to be hindered. For this reason, depending on whether the balls reach the direction change unit 8826 as a whole or one ball at a time, the flow-down mode of the balls changes, and there is a possibility that the player has to adjust the firing interval of the balls. Depending on the skill of the player, there arises a problem that the profit obtained by the player changes.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball descending speed (downward speed component) can be reduced by displacing the ball in the thickness direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). Since the direction in which the ball bounces away from the ball that comes later can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the balls from colliding with each other and the flow of the ball from deteriorating.

  In addition, the lower arc portion 8812b is configured by an arc having a radius of curvature larger than the first curvature radius 8812r, and the direction of the normal line is front-facing regardless of the arrangement, so that the ball collided with the lower arc portion 8812b. Can be bounced back to the front. Also by this, it can prevent that the flow of a sphere stagnates (the flow of a sphere can be made smooth).

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c), the shape of the recessed portion 8812 in a cross-sectional view taken along a plane extending in the lateral direction is a shape along the left-right direction. For this reason, the ball that collides and bounces back under the same conditions regardless of the collision position, so that the flow of the sphere flowing in the left-right direction on the front side of the recessed portion 8812 can be made uniform.

  As described above, the recessed portion 8812 has a shape (see FIG. 75 (b)) viewed in cross section along the plane extending in the vertical direction and a shape (see FIG. 75 (c)) viewed in cross section along the plane extending in the lateral direction. By being configured in different shapes, the influence on the sphere when the sphere collides with the recessed portion 8812 can be made different depending on the direction in which the sphere flows.

  With reference to FIG. 76, the flow path of the sphere will be described. FIG. 76 is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 8800 in the assembled state. In FIG. 76, the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 is not shown, and the vertical wall portion 73b is partially shown for easy understanding (see FIG. 2). In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised portion 8825 is omitted by an abbreviated line (falling from the left end of the fourth raised portion 8825). The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 76, the flow path through which the sphere flowing down via the direction changing portion 8826 passes is mainly divided into four. That is, along the first flow path O81 that is a path extending in the vertical direction through the center positions of the second projecting portion 8826b and the third projecting portion 8826c, and the left side surface of the second projecting portion 8826b as viewed from the front. A second downstream path B81 that is a path extending obliquely downward, a third downstream path B82 that is a path extending diagonally downward along the right side surface of the third projecting portion 8826c, and a direction It is divided into a fourth flow down path B83, which is a path that travels along the upper side surface of the changing portion 8826 to the right in front view.

  Among these four flow paths, the sphere passing through the first flow path O81 and the third flow path B82 passes between the flow wall surfaces 8825d and wins the second prize opening 640b when the electric accessory 640a is opened. there's a possibility that. Further, since the sphere passing through the second flow down path B81 reaches the fourth raised portion 8825 on the left side of the flow path wall surface 8825d, it is prevented from winning the second winning opening 640b. Further, the ball passing through the fourth flow down path B83 may jump over the locking portion 8825c and enter the discharge port 8825c1.

  The second flow down path B81 is a path along the left side surface of the second protruding portion 8826b. Here, as shown in FIG. 76, the second projecting portion 8826b has a center axis of an opening in which the direction of the tangent on the left side surface is formed by the pair of flow path wall surfaces 8825d as it goes from the upper end portion to the lower end portion. Consists of a shape that moves away from

  Thereby, when the sphere flows down along the second projecting portion 8826b, the speed of the sphere moves away from the opening formed by the pair of flow wall surfaces 8825d (direction to deviate) from the upper end to the lower end. Directed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the sphere flowing down along the left side surface of the second projecting portion 8826b to win the second winning opening 640b.

  Moreover, the 2nd convex part 8826b is comprised in the shape which goes away from the center axis | shaft of the opening formed by the flow-path wall surface 8825d as it goes to a lower end part from an upper end part. As a result, when the sphere flows down along the second projecting portion 8826b, the sphere is moved in a direction away from the opening formed by the flow wall surface 8825d (a direction away from the upper end portion toward the lower end portion). it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the sphere flowing down along the second projecting portion 8826b to win the second winning opening 640b.

  The paths X81 and X82 of the sphere that passes through the through gate 67 and reaches the direction changing portion 8826 will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, the center line O82 of the opening of the through gate 67 is disposed at a position translated by a predetermined distance D81 leftward in front view with the first flow path 81 as a reference.

  Since the second projecting portion 8826b is disposed at the center position between the center line O82 and the first flow down path O81, the flow down path of the sphere passing through the through gate 67 has a velocity in the left-right direction by the curved wall portion 8822c. After being given, the first path X81 passing through the right side of the second projecting portion 8826b, the second path X82 passing through the left side of the second projecting portion 8826b, and the direction toward the right side of the first route X81 The second branch path B83 branches along the upper side surface of the changing portion 8826.

  The ratio of branching can be set by various methods. For example, the ratio can be changed by changing the speed of the sphere passing through the through gate 67. That is, for example, the slower the velocity of the sphere, the more room the sphere can move in the left-right direction by a predetermined distance D81 during the flow of the sphere.

  In addition, as described above, the direction changing unit 8826 has an action of displacing the ball in the thickness direction of the game board 13 when the ball passes and reducing the vertical speed component, so that the direction change By the portion 8826, it is possible to make a sphere that flows down to the right among the spheres that have passed through the through gate 67, and a sphere that flows down (down) toward the second winning port 640b. It is possible to decelerate the sphere flowing down (falling) toward 640b.

  As a result, even when the through gate 67 and the electric charge 640a are unitized and the interval is narrowed as in this embodiment, the electric charge 640a is released by the action of the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67. In the meantime, the ball can be held between the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, as before, as a result of narrowing the interval between the through gate 67 and the electric charge 640a, the electric charge 640a is released before the electric charge 640a is opened by the action of the sphere passing through the through gate 67. Compared with a gaming machine in which the ball that has been triggered to open passes through the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to increase the profit that the player can obtain.

  In such a gaming machine, a lottery opportunity can be obtained by allowing the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to pass through the electric winning combination 640a and the second winning opening 640b, so that lottery is obtained at a high frequency. be able to.

  For example, even if the specification for performing the lottery digestion at a high speed is used, the player gets bored if there is a long gap between the variation effect related to the previous lottery and the variation effect related to the subsequent lottery (decrease in interest) To do). On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the frequency of the lottery can be increased by allowing the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to pass through the second winning opening 640b and receive the lottery, a free period occurs. To reduce the interest of the player while shortening the period until it becomes a big hit in the probability variation game by digesting the lottery at high speed (high frequency) it can.

  A sphere flow path Y81 that rolls on the upper surface of the second raised portion 8823 without passing through the through gate 67 will be described. When the sphere flowing down the flow path Y81 bounces to a height that reaches the direction change unit 8826, the sphere reaches the direction change unit 8826. In this case, the speed in the left-right direction is reduced due to the collision with the direction change portion 8826, so that the sphere can easily flow along the right side surface of the third protruding portion 8826c (flow along the third flow path B82). Easier to do). As a result, it is possible to change the flow down path of the sphere flowing down along the path jumping over the second winning port 640b to the flowing down route flowing into the second winning port 640b. Therefore, as compared with a sphere passing through the through gate 67, a sphere that flows down without passing through the through gate 67 is configured to easily win the second winning opening 640b.

  In other words, the sphere that has flowed down the path that passes through the through gate 67 (the highly advantageous path) has a high rate of flowing down along the path that has a low advantage thereafter, and the sphere that has flowed down while avoiding the through gate 67 is Thereafter, the advantage is increased (it becomes easier to win the second winning opening 640b). Thereby, even when an injustice is made by adjusting a nail that makes it easy to pass through the through gate 67, it is possible to prevent an extremely high advantage such as a situation where the ball is excessively projected.

  Further, by reducing the lateral velocity of the sphere flowing down along the flow path Y81 by the direction changing portion 8826, the sphere passing through the through gate 67 and the sphere flowing down along the flow path Y81 are likely to collide. Even so, the amount of movement of the sphere in the left-right direction due to the collision can be reduced. As a result, the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 collides with the sphere that flows down along the flow-down path Y81, so that the ball begins to roll to the left of the channel wall surface 8825d (in a direction away from the second winning port 640b). ) Can be prevented from reaching the fourth raised portion 8825 or the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows into the second winning opening 640b.

  Here, when a nail is implanted at a position where the direction changing portion 8826 is disposed to change the flow direction of the game ball, the space in which the game ball can flow is narrowed by the nail. When balls are gathered from many directions below the gate 67, there is a problem that ball clogging easily occurs. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the entire range of the merging region S81 that includes the direction changing portion 8826, and where the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 and the sphere that has deviated from the through gate 67 merge, It can be used as a flow path. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of the spheres and smoothly flow down the spheres.

  That is, in this embodiment, the nail | claw which narrows the flow path | route of a game ball | bowl is not planted in merge area S81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed into the merging region S81 from bouncing back in the direction in which it came, like when changing with a nail. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sphere that has flowed down in the flow path Y81 and has flowed into the merging region S81 rebounds and enters the discharge port 8825c1 without colliding with other spheres.

  Further, unlike the nail, the direction changing portion 8826 is not easily adjustable, so that the state of the direction changing portion 8826 can be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a goth act by a player who attempts to gain profits illegally by a goth act that illegally adjusts the direction in which the ball easily flows down.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case where a plurality of spheres are arranged in the vertical direction of direction changing portion 8826 will be described. 77A and 77B are partial front views of the flow path forming unit 8800. FIG. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, and two spheres retained above the electric accessory 640a are illustrated by phantom lines, and the covering plate The main body member 8821 of the member 8820 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the distance from the locus L81 of the sphere rolling on the electric accessory 640a and the rolling wall surface 8825b to the lower end of the direction change portion 8826 is set to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. When two spheres stay above 640a, the upper sphere can be disposed between the second projecting portion 8826b and the third projecting portion 8826c, and the sphere can be disposed between the second projecting portion 8826b and the third projecting portion 8826b. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being displaced in the left-right direction by being caught by the tip of the surface of the projecting portion 8826c that is oppositely disposed.

  That is, when nothing is formed at the position where the direction changing portion 8826 is disposed and the ball is surrounded by the flat portion of the base plate member 8810 and the flat portion of the covering plate member 8820, the sphere moves up and down on the electric accessory 640a. If they collide in the direction, the upper sphere will fly randomly, so it is difficult to win the upper sphere in the second winning opening 640b. As a result, the number of wasted balls increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the direction in which the upper sphere rebounds is suppressed to the range between the second protruding portion 8826b and the third protruding portion 8826c, and the upper sphere is kept on the first flow path O81. Can do. Therefore, the upper sphere can be maintained between the second projecting portion 8826b and the third projecting portion 8826c until the lower sphere passes, and the upper sphere can be opened after the electric accessory 640a is opened. Is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640b. Therefore, for example, a sphere that has flowed down along the flow path Y81 (bounced ball), and after falling from the second raised portion 8823, flows down without much jumping on the rolling wall surface 8825b (bounce compared to the flow path Y81). Even when a small ball collides in the vicinity of the opening formed by the flow path wall surface 8825d, both balls can be easily won in the second winning port 640b, and waste balls can be reduced.

  Since the direction changing portion 8826 and the recessed portion 8812 are disposed, the sphere has a speed in the front-rear direction, and the falling speed of the sphere is slower than the free fall. It becomes easy to earn time until the ball is released, and there is an effect that it is possible to reduce useless balls.

  With reference to FIG. 78, an example of how to rebound the sphere that has reached the direction changing portion 8826 through the flow down path Y81 (see FIG. 76) will be described.

  78A is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 8800, and FIG. 78B is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow path forming unit 8800 along the line LXXVIIIb-LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78A. 78 (c) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 8800, and FIG. 78 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow path forming unit 8800 along the line LXXVIIId-LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c). 78 (a) and 78 (c), the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820 is not shown, and in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), a sphere is used as the direction change portion 8826. The state before reaching is illustrated, and in FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the state after the sphere bounces off at the direction changing portion 8826 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 78A and 78B, when the sphere reaches the direction changing portion 8826 through the flow down path Y81, the sphere arrives from the right side of the direction changing portion 8826 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere collides with the inclined side surface 8826d1 of the fourth protruding portion 8826d. Here, since the inclined side surface 8826d1 is configured to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 8820, the velocity direction V81 of the ball that has collided and bounced is changed to the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the movement of the sphere in the left-right direction.

  In FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the sphere arrange | positioned in a different position is illustrated with the imaginary line as an example of arrangement | positioning of the sphere bounced off by the 4th convex part 8826d. The right sphere is illustrated as an example of rebounding to the recessed portion 8812 on the right side of the third protruding portion 8826c. In this case, when the sphere moves along the speed direction V82, the sphere collides with the right side surface of the third protruding portion 8826c, and the speed of the sphere in the left direction is reduced. Thereby, it is suppressed that a ball | bowl moves to the left direction any more, and a ball | bowl is flowed down along 3rd flow-down path | route B82.

  The left sphere is illustrated as an example of rebounding to the recessed portion 8812 on the right side of the second protruding portion 8826b. In this case, when the sphere moves along the speed direction V83, the sphere collides with the face-inclined side surface 8826b1 of the second protruding portion 8826b, the speed of the sphere toward the left is reduced, and the second protruding shape is provided. Since the portion 8826b is formed to be inclined downward toward the left in FIG. 78 (c), the velocity of the ball after the collision is changed downward. Thereby, it is suppressed that a ball | bowl moves to the left direction any more, and a ball | bowl is flowed down along 1st flow-down path | route O81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the passing of the sphere to the left of the direction changing portion 8826 and to increase the number of spheres that win the second winning opening 640b.

  Further, by changing the speed of the sphere in the left-right direction to the front-rear direction, for example, when the sphere is flowing down on the first flow path O81, the sphere arrives from the right side of the direction changing portion 8826, and the sphere In the event of a collision, the load in the left-right direction applied to the sphere flowing down the first flow path O81 can be reduced, and the sphere flowing down the first flow path O81 can be prevented from being ejected in the left-right direction.

  With reference to FIG. 79, a description will be given of how to rebound when a sphere flowing down in the vertical direction collides with the recessed portion 8812 and rebounds. FIG. 79 is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow path forming unit 8800 taken along the line LXXIX-LXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 79, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the recessed portion 8812 are shown enlarged. Further, in FIG. 79, the movement path on which the ball rebounds is indicated by arrows C81, C82, and C83.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the sphere bounced off the upper surface of the direction change portion 8826 collides with the upper arc portion 8812a of the recessed portion 8812 and bounces back. At this time, when the sphere moves along the arrow C81 and collides with the front side (left side in FIG. 79) of the upper arc portion 8812a and bounces back, the speed direction after the bounce is closer to the up and down direction than before the bounce. You can turn around. On the other hand, when the sphere moves along the arrow C82 and collides with the portion near the back side (left side in FIG. 79) of the upper arc portion 8812a and bounces back, the velocity component in the front-rear direction is larger than the ball bounced off by the arrow C81. Maintained.

  This prevents the ball that has collided with the upper arc portion 8812a from bouncing back and colliding with the inclined portion on the upper side of the direction changing portion 8826 again, and at a position where there is less fear of recollising with the direction changing portion 8826 (recessed portion). The ball that collides with the upper arc portion 8812a at a position below 8812 bounces back toward the front, whereby the flow of the sphere can be prevented from stagnation (the flow of the sphere can be made smooth). ).

  In addition, the lower arc portion 8812b is configured by an arc having a radius of curvature larger than the first curvature radius 8812r, and the direction of the normal line is front-facing regardless of the arrangement, so that the ball collided with the lower arc portion 8812b. Can be bounced back to the front. Also by this, it can prevent that the flow of a sphere stagnates (the flow of a sphere can be made smooth).

  With reference to FIG. 80, the change in the velocity of the sphere reaching the through gate 67 will be described. FIG. 80A to FIG. 80C are partial front views of the game board 13. 80 (a) and 80 (b) show a state in which the nails P81 and P82 are even implanted vertically from the game board 13, and in FIG. 80 (c), the tips of the nails P81 and P82 are shown. The state bent in the aspect which moves to the lower right of the front view is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B, the sphere is arranged above the flow path forming unit 8800 as illustrated in the flow paths Z81 and Z82 before reaching the through gate 67. The nail P81, P82, P83, and P84 collided a plurality of times and flow down while changing the direction of the sphere, so the speed is reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), when the tips of the nails P81 and P82 arranged below the flow path E81 of the sphere are bent in such a manner as to move to the lower right in front view, Like the illustrated sphere, the nail P81, P82 and the sphere can be brought into contact with each other in a rubbing manner, and the sphere can easily enter the through gate 67 without colliding with the nail P83, P84. As a result, the sphere can reach the through gate 67 while maintaining a large flow velocity of the sphere.

  In this case, since the rate at which the balls flow down to the right of the nails P81 and P82 is reduced, if the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second winning port 640b (see FIG. 76) as it is, It becomes a problem that it becomes possible to increase the game performance, and it becomes impossible to provide equal playability.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, a sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 is branched by the first path X81 or the second path X82, so It is possible to make it impossible to enter the second winning opening 640b. For example, the flow path of the sphere can be branched based on a predetermined value of the speed of the sphere passing through the through gate 67. In this case, the sphere flowing down along the flow path E81 (high speed) is the second path X82. The sphere (low speed) flowing down along the flow paths Z81 and Z82 can flow down along the first path X81 (curved to the right in the front view of FIG. 76 by a predetermined distance D81 due to the low vertical speed). A sphere can flow along the direction of the wall portion 8822c).

  Therefore, even if the nails P81 and P82 are illegally bent and the balls are likely to gather in the through gate 67, the balls that have reached the through gate 67 in this state are in the second winning opening 640b (see FIG. 76). It is possible to suppress winning, and to prevent an adjustment in which the number of payouts increases illegally.

  Moreover, according to the structure of this embodiment, the advantage and disadvantage of the profit provided to a player can be reversed with the change of a gaming state. For example, a gaming machine that is advantageous in the short-time state but disadvantageous in the special game state can be configured. This will be described in detail below.

  In the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), as described above, a short-time state and a special game state are configured as the game state.

  81 and 82 are partial front views of the flow path forming unit 8800. FIG. 81 and 82 show the case where the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is in a time-short state. In FIG. 81, the ratio Xp of the sphere that has flowed down from the upstream of the nails 81 and 83 passes through the through gate 67. FIG. 82 shows a ratio Xp in which a sphere that has flowed down from the upstream of the nails 81 and 83 passes through the through gate 67. This is illustrated in the case where is smaller than the ratio Yp flowing down to the right above the inclined surface portion 8822b.

  In FIGS. 81 and 82, in order to represent a state in which the electric combination 640a is opened, the electric combination 640a is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the direction change unit 8826 has a single reference numeral for easy understanding. Part is omitted. In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised portion 8825 is omitted by an abbreviated line (falling from the left end of the fourth raised portion 8825). The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2). In addition, when the sphere flows down from the upstream of the nails 81 and 83, it is configured in such a manner that it always passes through the flow path of either the through gate 67 or the right side of the inclined surface portion 8822b. .

  In the short time state shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in this embodiment, the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, when the structure of the game area is such that the ball can easily pass through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 81), it is easy to maintain the state where the electric accessory 640a is opened, and the second winning port 640b is reached. It is possible to facilitate the entry of the ball. Therefore, the player can obtain the advantage that a lottery opportunity can be obtained with high frequency in the short-time state and a winning ball can be obtained by entering the second winning port 640b.

  On the other hand, some of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the discharge port 8825c1 along the fourth flow down path B83. The sphere that has flowed down the flow-down path Y81 without passing through the through gate 67 flows down along the direction away from the opening of the discharge port 8825c1, and thus it is difficult to flow into the discharge port 8825c1. That is, the more spheres that pass through the through gate 67, the more disadvantageous that the number of spheres that die into the discharge port 8825c1 increases.

  On the other hand, when the configuration of the game area is such that the ball easily flows down over the inclined surface portion 8822b (see FIG. 82), it is difficult to maintain the state where the electric accessory 640a is opened, The number of dead spheres flowing into the outlet 8825c1 can be reduced.

  83 and 84 are partial front views of the flow path forming unit 8800. FIG. 83 and 84 show the case where the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is in a special game state, and in FIG. 83, the proportion of the balls flowing down from the upstream of the nails 81 and 83 passes through the through gate 67. The case where Xp is larger than the ratio Yp flowing downward to the right above the inclined surface portion 8822b is illustrated, and in FIG. 84, the ratio of the sphere flowing down from the upstream of the nails 81 and 83 passing through the through gate 67. The case where Xp is smaller than the ratio Yp flowing down to the right above the inclined surface portion 8822b is illustrated.

  83 and 84 show a state in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a part of the reference numeral of the direction changing unit 8826 is omitted for easy understanding. In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised portion 8825 is omitted by an abbreviated line (falling from the left end of the fourth raised portion 8825). The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2). In addition, when the sphere flows down from the upstream of the nails 81 and 83, it is configured in such a manner that it always passes through the flow path of either the through gate 67 or the right side of the inclined surface portion 8822b. .

  In the special gaming state, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes regardless of whether or not the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the present embodiment, the first variable prize-winning device 65 is arranged at a position where a ball that rolls on the fourth raised portion 8825 falls from the left end of the fourth raised portion 8825 and can enter the ball.

  Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to reduce the number of spheres flowing down from other than the left end of the fourth raised portion 8825. Here, as described above, the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 is branched in the flow-down direction by the direction changing portion 8826, and some of the spheres flow into the discharge port 8825c1 and die spheres (the prize balls). Sphere that does not get entangled). In the special game state, passing through the through gate 67 does not give a profit to the player, so that the dead ball becomes a ball that is discharged without giving any special profit to the player.

  Therefore, if the structure of the game area is such that a ball can easily pass through the through gate 67, in the short time state (see FIG. 81), the advantage that a lottery can be obtained at a high frequency can be obtained. In the state (see FIG. 83), the disadvantage that many spheres are dead appears significantly.

  On the other hand, when the configuration of the game area is such that the ball does not easily pass through the through gate 67 and is easy to flow down the inclined surface portion 8822b, in the short time state (see FIG. 82), Although it becomes difficult to maintain the openness and the disadvantage that the frequency of the lottery is reduced, in the special game state (see FIG. 84), the player can play the game comfortably with few dead balls. The advantage that can be obtained.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the gaming state is configured regardless of whether the ball is configured to easily pass through the through gate 67 or the ball is difficult to pass through the through gate 67. It can be reversed whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player by changing between the short-time state and the special gaming state. Thereby, it is adjusted whether or not the configuration of the game area easily passes through the through gate 67 (for example, the nails P81 to P84 arranged on the upstream side of the through gate 67 are bent incorrectly) By adjusting the flow-down mode), it is possible to suppress a drastic change in the profit given to the player.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the curved wall portion 8822c disposed immediately below the through gate 67 slightly protrudes from the end portion of the opening width of the through gate 67 to the opening side of the through gate 67 has been described. In the flow path forming unit 9800 in the embodiment, the curved wall portion 9822c extends to the center axis of the opening of the through gate 67. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 85 is a partial front view of a flow path forming unit 9800 in the ninth embodiment. 85, illustration of the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 9820 is omitted, and the vertical wall portion 73b is partially illustrated. In addition, the first variable winning device 65 is partially illustrated, and the illustration between the first variable winning device 65 and the fourth raised portion 8825 is omitted by an abbreviated line (falling from the left end of the fourth raised portion 8825). The ball flows down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 85, the first raised portion 9822 includes a curved wall portion 9822c that is curved and extends downward from the lower left end portion in front view of the housing portion 8822a. The curved wall portion 9822 c is extended in an arc shape having a center on the opening side of the through gate 67, and the extended end portion is disposed on the central axis of the through gate 67.

  A path X91 of a sphere flowing down through the through gate 67 is illustrated. The route X91 is a route equivalent to the fourth flow down route B83 (see FIG. 76) in the eighth embodiment. As shown in the path X91, the sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 is changed in the left-right direction by the curved wall portion 9822c and discharged to the right, so that the ball rebounds at the rolling wall portion 8825b and the locking portion 8825c is moved. It jumps over and is led to the discharge port 8825c1. The discharge port 8825c1 is an opening formed between the locking portion 8825c and the second raised portion 8823 and facing leftward.

  As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can be directed to the second out port 315 regardless of the speed, so that the game area has become illegally easy to pass through the through gate 67. However, the lottery with the predetermined number of shot balls cannot be directly received, and the balls frequently flow into the discharge port 8825c1, so that the profit given to the player is excessively large. Can be prevented.

  Here, the direction of the discharge port 8825c1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, the discharge port 8825c1 is opened in a direction that can easily receive a sphere (having a velocity component in the right direction in FIG. 85) flowing down along the path X91, and does not pass through the through gate 67. Opened in a direction in which it is difficult to accept a sphere that collides with the upper surface of 8823 and flows down (for example, a sphere that flows down in the flow path Y81 (see FIG. 76) (having a velocity component in the left direction in FIG. 76)). Accordingly, it is possible to easily enter the ball flowing down through the through gate 67 into the discharge port 8825c1, and to pass the ball passing through the right side of the through gate 67 (for example, a ball rolling on the inclined surface portion 8822b) to the discharge port 8825c1. It can be difficult to enter the ball.

  Therefore, while a ball whose advantage has been increased by passing through the through gate 67 can be prevented from continuing to win the second winning port 640b, a ball having a low advantage by not passing through the through gate 67 is The possibility of winning a prize at the second prize opening 640b or the first variable prize winning device 65 can be increased.

  Note that the ball that bounces along the route X91 is directed to the second out port 315 (see FIG. 2), but reaches the rolling wall portion 8825b through a different route (for example, the downflow route Y81 (see FIG. 76)), and the like. The ball that rolls on the rolling wall portion 8825b to the right in front view due to the collision with the ball enters the discharge port 8825c1 and locks toward the second out port 315 along the vertical wall portion 73b. This can be prevented by the portion 8825c. Therefore, the engaging portion 8825c can prevent the ball reaching the rolling wall portion 8825b from entering the discharge port 8825c1 through a low-efficiency route (for example, the flow-down route Y81 (see FIG. 76)).

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the direction changing unit 8826 is fixed has been described. However, the flow path forming unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment is configured such that the direction changing member 10830 can be displaced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 86 (a) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 86 (b) is a partial cross section of the flow path forming unit 10800 along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). 86 (c) is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 10800, and FIG. 86 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow path forming unit 10800 along the line LXXXVId-LXXXVId in FIG. 86 (c). It is. 86 (a) and 86 (b) show the state where the direction changing member 10830 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 86 (b), and FIGS. 86 (c) and 86 (d) show the direction. The state in which the changing member 10830 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 86 (d) is shown. 86A and 86C, the covering plate 10820 is not shown.

  86 (a) to 86 (d), the flow path forming unit 10800 includes a base plate member 10810, a covering plate member 10820 arranged to face the base plate member 10810, and the flow direction of the sphere. And a direction changing member 10830 for changing.

  The base plate member 10810 is a rectangular shape that is recessed in a horizontally long rectangle on the back side (FIG. 86 (a) the back side of the sheet) below the plate-like main body member 10811 and the through gate 67 disposed in the main body member 10811. It mainly includes a recessed portion 10812 and a shaft supporting portion 10813 which is disposed at both ends of the rectangular recessed portion 10812 and whose inner periphery that pivotally supports the direction changing member 10830 is an arcuate claw portion.

  The rectangular recess 10812 is a recess that accommodates the cylindrical portions of the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833 of the direction change member 10830.

  The direction change member 10830 is a member that is pivotally supported by the base plate member 10810, and is formed in a cylindrical shape through which the shaft member 10831 that is pivotally supported by the base plate member 10810 and the shaft member 10831 are inserted. And a torsion spring 10834 that generates an urging force that causes the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833 to return upward (rotate clockwise in FIG. 86 (b)). In addition, the 1st flow path O81 is formed in the contact part of the cylindrical parts 10832 and 10833.

  The cylindrical portion 10832 is a tangential direction, and each of the first extending claw portion 10832a extending from the cylindrical portion 10832 in a different direction (a direction forming an angle of 135 degrees in the present embodiment), and a second An extended claw portion 10832b.

  Here, the first extended claw portion 10832a and the second extended claw portion 10832b are disposed at the end portion on the side close to the cylindrical portion 10833 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86A). The first extending claw portion 10832a has a shape in which the third raising member 8824 is disposed on an extended line extending from the lower end portion in the longitudinal direction along the longitudinal direction.

  The cylindrical portion 10833 is a tangential direction, and each of the third extending claw portions 10833a extends from both ends of the cylindrical portion 10833 in different directions (directions forming an angle of 135 degrees in the present embodiment). And a fourth extending claw portion 10833b.

  Here, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86A), the third extending claw portion 10833a is disposed at the end portion on the side close to the cylindrical portion 10832, and the second extending claw portion 10832b. The fourth extending claw portion 10833b is disposed at the opposite end of the tubular portion 10832, and is the same as the tangent along the first extending claw portion 10832a. It extends along the tangent line.

  The third extending claw portion 10833a includes a protruding portion 10833a1 that protrudes toward the second extending claw portion 10832b and to which the torsion spring 10834 is locked.

  The torsion spring 10834 is disposed (wrapped) at the contact portion of the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833, and rotates the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833 in the upward direction (FIG. 86 (b) clockwise) via the protruding portion 10833a1. A biasing force is generated.

  The state shown in FIG. 86 (b) corresponds to a state in which the sphere is not disposed between the first extended claw portion 10832a and the fourth extended claw portion 10833b. In this case, the distance between the fourth extending claw portion 10833b and the covering plate member 10820 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere that has reached the direction change member 10830 from the right side of the direction change member 10830 is Since it can reach the third extended claw portion 10833a through the 4 extended claw portion 10833b, it can flow down along the first flow path O81 (or the right side surface of the third extended claw portion 10833a). Is done.

  On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 86 (d) corresponds to the state in which the sphere is disposed between the first extended claw portion 10832a and the fourth extended claw portion 10833b. That is, due to the weight of the sphere, the second extended claw portion 10832b and the third extended claw portion 10833a are brought close to the main body member 10811, and the first extended claw portion 10832a and the fourth extended claw portion 10833b are separated from the main body member 10811. Corresponds to the separated state.

  In this case, the distance between the first extending claw portion 10732a and the fourth extending claw portion 10833b and the covering plate member 10820 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, and the direction change member 10830 changes its direction from the right in front view. A sphere that has reached the member 10830 (for example, has flowed down along the flow path Y81) is unable to get over the fourth extending claw portion 10833b.

  Thereby, in a state where the sphere is arranged on the front side of the second extended claw portion 10832b and the third extended claw portion 10833a, the ball comes from the right side of the front view (for example, flows down along the flow path Y81). Since the sphere can be prevented from entering the direction change member 10830, when the sphere that has flowed down along the flow path Y81 is disposed on the front side of the second extended claw portion 10832b and the third extended claw portion 10833a, By following the sphere and colliding with another sphere that has flowed down along the flow-down path Y81, the flow-down path of the sphere that has reached the front side of the second extended claw part 10832b and the third extended claw part 10833a first becomes the first. It is possible to prevent deviation from the one flow path O81 (shift to the left in FIG. 86 (a)). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball flowing down along the flow path Y81 to win a second winning opening (see FIG. 76).

  In addition, the direction changing member 10830 is in a posture in which the first extending claw portion 10832a is close to the covering plate member 10820 in the state shown in FIGS. 86 (c) and 86 (d). The sphere that has passed through is made to flow easily in the longitudinal direction of the first extending claw portion 10832a. This makes it difficult for the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to win the second winning opening 640b (see FIG. 76).

  For example, when the spheres flow down through the through gate 67 in a daisy chain, the posture of the direction change member 10830 is allowed by the first sphere while allowing the first sphere to flow along the first flow path O81. 86 is changed to the state of FIG. 86D, the second and subsequent spheres can be made to easily flow down along the longitudinal direction of the first extending claw portion 10832a, and the spheres along the first flow down path O81. Can be prevented from flowing down. Thereby, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in a daisy chain, it is possible to prevent the second winning opening 640b (see FIG. 76) from being won in a daisy chain.

  From these, for example, when the configuration of the game area is such that the ball easily passes through the through gate 67 (for example, when 60% of the ball passing upstream of the through gate 67 passes) While it is easy to open the object 640a (see FIG. 73), a part of the sphere that passes through the through gate 67 in a row is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640b (see FIG. 73), and is moved to the second winning opening 640b. By making the balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 (40% of the balls passing through the upstream of the through gate 67) mainly enter, the profit given to the player becomes excessively large. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, for example, when the configuration of the game area is such that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the through gate 67 (for example, when only 10% of the ball flowing down the through gate 67 passes), the through gate Even if spheres flowing down along the flow path Y81 without passing through 67 collide with each other, the balls are prevented from being ejected to the left and coming off the second winning opening 640b, and a large number of spheres ( 90% of the balls passing through the upstream of the through gate 67 can be awarded to the second prize opening 640b, so that the profit given to the player can be ensured (the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open). And prevents the situation where the ball does not pass even if it is opened).

  Therefore, regardless of the state of the gaming area on the upstream side of the through gate 67 (ease of passing the ball to the through gate), it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from excessively increasing or decreasing.

  As a method of manufacturing the direction change member 10830, the shaft member 10831 is inserted into an intermediate portion (a ring-shaped portion) of the torsion spring 10834, and then the cylindrical portions 10832 and 10833 are inserted from both ends of the shaft member 10831. Examples of the method include fitting the respective side surfaces of the tubular portions 10832 and 10833 that are arranged close to each other.

  Thereby, even when the shape of each extended claw part 10832a, 10832b, 10833a, 10833b is larger than the inner diameter of the intermediate part (ring-shaped part) of the torsion spring 10834, the direction changes as in this embodiment. A torsion spring 10834 can be disposed in the middle portion of the member 10830. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), one end of the torsion spring 10834 is a recess disposed in the base plate member 10810 (a recess extending downward from an intermediate portion of the rectangular recess 10813). It is arrange | positioned in the aspect buried in.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described eighth embodiment, the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 (for example, the first path X81), and the flow path of the game ball that flows to the right of the through gate 67 and flows down the upper surface of the inclined surface portion 8822b. The case where Y81 merges before reaching the first variable winning device 65 in the merge area S81 has been described. However, the flow path forming unit 11800 in the eleventh embodiment flows down the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67. The path X111 and the flow-down paths Y81 and Y111 are formed so as to reach the first variable winning device 65 through separate independent flow paths. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 87 is a partial front view of the flow path forming unit 11800 in the eleventh embodiment. 87, the main body member 8821 of the covering plate member 11820 is not shown, and the vertical wall portion 73b is partially illustrated.

  The covering plate member 11820 includes a plate-like main body member 8821 (see FIG. 73) disposed at a predetermined distance on the front side of the main body member 8811 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), and the rear side from the main body member 8821. A plurality of raised portions 11822, 8823, 11824, 8825 formed in a raised manner and opposed to the front side of the recessed portion 8812 of the base plate member 8810 in the assembled state (see FIG. 3) and the back side of the main body member 8821 And a direction changing portion 11826 that protrudes from the center.

  The plurality of raised portions are composed of a first raised portion 11822, a second raised portion 8823, a third raised portion 11824, and a fourth raised portion 8825, each having the same length (more than the diameter of the game ball). By increasing the height (length), in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), a flow path is formed in which a sphere can flow down in the portion surrounded by the raised portions 11822, 8823, 11824, 8825 and the body members 8811, 8821.

  The first raised portion 11822 is curved and extended downward from the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 87) at the lower end portion of the housing portion 8822a, the inclined surface portion 8822b, and the housing portion 8822a described in the eighth embodiment. A wall portion 11822c.

  The curved wall portion 11822c extends to the same position in the left-right direction as the vertical line passing through the right end portion of the third raised portion 11824. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upper side of the curved wall portion 11822c rolls down on the upper side of the third raised portion 11824 and flows down.

  The third raised portion 11824 is a plate-like portion that is inclined downwardly to the lower left and is disposed at a predetermined distance vertically below the left side surface (the right side surface in FIG. 73) of the accommodating portion 8822a. The third raised portion 11824 is disposed below the extending end of the curved wall portion 11822c, and the left end portion extends to the vicinity of the outer frame of the main body member 8811. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper side of the curved wall portion 11822c falls to the upper side of the third raised portion 11824, and the game ball rolling on the third raised portion 11824 is subsequently removed from the main body member 8811. It flows down above a plurality of nails P111 planted from the game board 13 outside the frame.

  In the present embodiment, the rolling plate Ia that is extended from the vicinity of the upper right portion of the outer frame of the lower panel unit 300 in a downwardly inclined manner toward the left and is integrally formed with the main body 311 is the main body 311. It protrudes toward the front side.

  Similar to the third raising member 11824, the rolling plate Ia is a portion that rolls the game ball that has reached from above, and the gap between the game board 13 and the glass plate that is arranged to face is the diameter of the game ball. It protrudes to the following position. The right end portion of the rolling plate Ia is disposed below the nail disposed at the left end of the plurality of nails P111, and the vertical line passing through the left end portion of the left end portion of the rolling plate Ia is the first specified. The winning opening 65a is arranged at a position passing through the left side of the center position in the left-right direction.

  The plurality of nails P111 are arranged so as to incline downward toward the left, and are arranged at intervals (for example, intervals equal to or less than the radius of the game balls) at which the game balls do not fall into the gaps between the nails P111. An interval between the nail disposed at the left end of the plurality of nails P111 and the rolling plate Ia is an interval at which the game ball does not fall (for example, an interval equal to or less than the radius of the game ball). An interval between the nail disposed at the right end of the inner portion and the extended end portion of the third raised portion 11824 is an interval at which the game ball does not fall (for example, an interval equal to or less than the radius of the game ball).

  By configuring in this way, the curved wall portion 11822c of the game balls flowing through the through gate 67 and flowing down the flow path X111 rolls, and then the third raised portion 11824, the plurality of nails P111, It is possible to increase the proportion of game balls flowing down through the upper side of the rolling plate Ia in order. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will subsequently win the second winning opening 640b.

  On the other hand, the game ball flowing down on the downflow path Y81 basically flows down toward the second winning port 640b. The game ball flowing down this flow path Y81 passes through the back side of the direction changing portion 11826 when greatly rebounding on the rolling wall surface 8825b.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the direction changing portion 11826 is a plate-like portion that slopes downward toward the left, and the left end is on the right side of the center axis of the opening formed by the pair of flow wall surfaces 8825d. Placed in the direction.

  Similar to the direction change unit 8826 in the eighth embodiment, the direction change unit 11826 is a part that rebounds the reached game ball in the front-rear direction, the up-down direction, and the left-right direction, so that the game ball can pass between the recessed part 8812. It protrudes toward the back side with a gap.

  In this embodiment, since the direction change portion 11826 is inclined downward as it goes to the left, many game balls that have flowed down the flow path Y81 and bounced off the rolling wall surface 8825b to reach the back side of the direction change portion 11826 In this case, it bounces back in the lower right direction of the front view or downward in the front view. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball flowing down on the flow-down path Y81 jumps above the flow path formed by the flow path wall surface 8825d and does not go to the second winning port 640b.

  Below the left end of the contact wall surface 8825a in the vertical direction, there is provided a general winning port 63 through which about 20% of the game balls that have flowed down along the flow path Y111 win. For example, when the game ball is made to be excessively easy to go to the flow path X111 (more than half of the game balls) by the prize ball of the general winning opening 63, a few game balls passing through the flow path Y81 are unlucky. In addition, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, a game ball that rolls down and flows down on the electric accessory 640a (game ball toward the second out port 315) has a positive possibility to win the general winning port 63. Thus, it is possible to improve the attention of the game ball and improve the right-handed ball holding.

  The game ball that does not win the general winning opening 63 and flows down to the left is formed in such a manner as to flow down the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the first variable winning device 65 is open. The game ball wins the first specific winning opening 65a.

  With this configuration, the game ball that does not pass through the through gate 67 and rolls rightward on the upper surface of the inclined surface portion 8822b and flows down on the flow down path Y81 corresponds to the gaming state, and the second prize opening. It is possible to make a high-frequency win at any one of 640b (mainly in the time-saving state), the first specific winning opening 65a (mainly in the special gaming state) or the general winning opening 63. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the proportion of the number of game balls that go to the second out port 315 as they are among the game balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 and have not yet given any profit to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the special gaming state, both the game ball that passes through the through gate 67 and flows down on the flow down path X111, and the game ball that does not pass through the through gate 67 and flows down on the down flow path Y81 are both the first specific prize opening 65a. It is possible to win a prize. However, the expectation degree (probability) of the prize varies depending on the route through which the game balls flow down.

  That is, both the game ball flowing down on the flow down path X111 and the game ball flowing down on the flow down paths Y81, Y111 flow down at a front left speed, but the left end of the rolling plate Ia is the first specified. Since it is arranged on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center position in the left-right direction of the winning opening 65a, the game ball that has flowed down along the flow path X111 and has flowed down the front side of the opened first specific winning opening 65a is the first. There are many situations where the specific winning opening 65a is not earned in a straight line and deviates to the left.

  On the other hand, the game balls flowing down on the flow-down paths Y81 and Y111 pass through the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a in the vicinity of the right end portion of the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the opened first variable winning device 65 is opened. After landing on the right end of the rolling surface (upper side surface (inner side surface) of the door that opens to the front side with the lower end as an axis), the game balls are left and right until they are guided to the first specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to secure a sufficient distance for rolling. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball that has reached the front side of the opened first specific winning opening 65a among the gaming balls that have flowed down on the flow path Y81 will win the first specific winning opening 65a.

  Thereby, in this embodiment, compared with the game ball which passed through the through gate 67, it can be comprised in the aspect in which the game ball which remove | deviated from the through gate 67 tends to win the 1st specific winning opening 65a. .

  In other words, the sphere that has flowed down the path that passes through the through gate 67 (the highly advantageous path) has a high rate of flowing down along the path that has a low advantage thereafter, and the sphere that has flowed down while avoiding the through gate 67 is Thereafter, the degree of advantage is increased (it becomes easier to win the first specific winning opening 65a). Thereby, for example, in the case where fraud is performed by adjusting the nail so as to easily pass through the through gate 67, it is possible to reduce the number of balls in the special gaming state (increase the number of wasted balls flowing down the flow path X111). On the other hand, for example, when a nail adjustment that is difficult to pass through the through gate 67 is performed, many balls flow down the flow path Y81 in the special game state, so that the big hit game with almost no useless balls Can enjoy.

  That is, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being extremely increased or decreased by adjusting the nail or the like. From this premise, in the present embodiment, for example, as in the eighth to tenth embodiments, for example, whether the hall side is to play games with emphasis on pitching or game with emphasis on rotation rate is selected, When adjusting, it is possible to prevent an extreme game from being mistakenly caused by a slight difference in adjustment. Thereby, the ease of the adjustment can be improved.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front rail portion 715 is formed from a single arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of arcs, and the direction of the adjacent arcs may be reversed (wave shape). In this case, since the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the posture of the effect member 620 is unstable, it is possible to perform an effect of rattling the effect member 620.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support 613 when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the center of gravity may be disposed obliquely above the first shaft support 613.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outside in the width direction. In this case, the speed of the sphere flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the board surface width direction can be decelerated by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the sphere can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as a long hole has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the displacement of the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by extending and contracting the transmission member 640. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the position of the contact part 644 can be switched between two positions has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously changed (movable). In this case, the change rate of the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the posture of the tip swinging member 6556 changes at two positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture change of the tip swinging member 6556 may be caused in a plurality of stages. In this case, a plurality of types of swinging amounts of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 can be formed, and variations in production can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the cross-sectional shape of the concave portion 8812 in a plane parallel to the vertical direction is an arc shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be recessed in a trapezoidal shape. In this case, the trapezoid-shaped inclined surface forms the upper and lower side surfaces of the recessed portion 8812, so that the velocity of the sphere that collides with the upper side surface can be changed downward. In addition, the shape of the recessed portion 8812 may be an appropriate shape, and a cushioning member such as urethane or rubber may be disposed on the side surface of the recessed portion 8812. In this case, the speed of the sphere colliding with the recessed portion 8812 can be easily reduced by the buffering action of the buffer member.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the through gate 67 is disposed substantially vertically above the opening formed by the flow wall surface 8825d has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the through gate 67 may be arranged on the left side with respect to the opening formed by the flow path wall surface 8825d, that is, on the downstream side of the contact wall surface 8825a. In this case, it is possible to suppress the ball passing through the through gate 67 from winning the second winning opening 640b from the arrangement of the members.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the electric accessory 640a does not open and close in the special gaming state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even in the special game state, the electric accessory 640a may be opened when the ball passes through the through gate 67. In this case, it is possible to increase the profit that the player can obtain in the special game state.

  In the eighth embodiment, whether or not to pass through the through gate 67 is distributed, and the ball that has not passed through the through gate 67 is more likely to pass through the second winning port 640b, thereby allowing the player to Although the case where the balance of the profits to be granted is maintained has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, separate through gates are arranged in both of the divided two flow paths, and there is a difference in profits given to the player for each through gate (for example, a difference in the probability of opening the electric accessory 640b by passing a ball) ) May be provided. In addition, for example, different winning holes are provided in both of the two flow paths that are distributed, and the number of prize balls is different for each of the different winning holes, so that there is a difference in the profits given to the player. May be allowed.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the first variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position where a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can win is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the arrangement of the through gate 67 and the first variable winning device 65 may be greatly separated in the left-right direction so that a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 cannot be awarded to the first variable winning device 65. In this case, if the configuration of the game area is changed to a configuration in which the ball easily passes through the through gate 67, it becomes difficult for the ball to win the first variable winning device 65. Cause an unbearable hindrance (to make it easier to notice alterations). This causes dissatisfaction with the player, and there is a possibility that it will not be possible to continue to play the game.Therefore, a person who intends to gain profits by changing the configuration of the gaming area will change the configuration of the gaming area. Modification can be suppressed.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the plurality of direction change portions 8826 are provided so as to protrude from the covering plate member 8820 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, of the four direction change portions 8826, the two on the left side protrude from the covering plate member 8820 toward the back side, and the two on the right side protrude from the base plate member 8810 toward the front side. Thus, you may mix the part projected in the reverse direction of the front-back direction. In this case, the game ball that is in contact with the two left direction change portions 8826 (the first projecting portion 8826a and the second projecting portion 8826b) and pushed toward the back side is likely to flow to the right. In this case, it is possible to easily make contact with the two right direction change portions 8826 in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to make the game ball easily flow down along the first flow down path O81.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the curved wall portion 11822c prevents the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from flowing down toward the direction change portion 11826 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as described in the eighth embodiment, the direction changing unit 11826 may be disposed in a gaming machine configured such that a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down toward the electric accessory 640a. In this case, the direction change portion 11826 can be configured as a single protrusion to facilitate the design, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 abuts on the upper surface of the direction change portion 11826 and passes through the through gate 67. Since the game ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the inclined surface portion 8822b can be configured to come into contact with the lower surface of the direction change portion 11826, the shape of the direction change portion 11826 can be devised for each direction in which the game ball is received. The influence on the game ball can be changed.

  For example, the lower side surface of the direction change unit 11826 may be configured as a flat surface, while the upper side surface may be configured as an upward convex curved surface. In this case, since the angle of the side surface of the direction change portion 11826 that hits and flows down from the through gate 67 is the same regardless of the height at which the game ball rebounds, the game ball rebounds uniformly (mechanically) downward. It can be set as an aspect. In addition, a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has reached the direction change portion 11826 has a slight difference in the flow path, and a difference in contact position with the direction change portion 11826 (from the upper surface of the direction change portion 11826 at the contact position). Difference in normal direction), and a plurality of ways to rebound the game ball can be formed.

  Accordingly, the game ball bounced off the rolling wall surface 8825b is bounced back at a uniform angle (mechanically), and the period until the game ball reaches the second winning opening 640b is shortened regardless of the bounce height. On the other hand, since the movement (ball splash) of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can be prevented from becoming uniform, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball.

  In addition, as a flow path of the game ball that bounces after passing through the through gate 67 and colliding with the direction change portion 11826, the game ball is landed on the fourth raised portion 8825 at a position deviated to the left of the upper opening of the flow wall surface 8825d. And a downflow path that lands at a position where the game ball can enter the upper opening of the channel wall surface 8825d (for example, a position directly above the center position in the left-right direction of the electric accessory 640a), It is possible to create an opportunity for the game ball to go to the second winning port 640b after passing through the through gate 67, and to improve the player's attention to the game ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of the technical idea of changing the driving force transmission by the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550>
A crank member that is rotated about the first axis and has a protruding portion protruding from the first axis, and an insertion portion through which the protruding portion is inserted, and is spaced apart from the first position and the first position. An arm member formed to be movable between a second position and a driving device that generates a driving force for rotating the crank member around the first axis, wherein the insertion portion is inserted The driving force is transmitted to the arm member when the protruding portion comes into contact with an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protruding portion, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine comprising: a transmission area formed to be movable between positions; and a non-transmission area that is connected to the transmission area and that blocks transmission of the driving force. A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a crank member provided with a projecting portion protruding at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft, and an arm member provided with an insertion portion through which the projecting portion of the crank member is inserted are provided. There is a gaming machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (see, for example, JP 2009-000306 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. For this reason, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the start timing of the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when the crank member is started, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, and there is a problem that the drive device becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes a transmission region and a non-transmission region coupled to the transmission region, the crank member is inserted into the non-transmission region. By starting the member, the timing for driving the arm member and the timing for starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. Thereby, the driving force required at the time of starting of a crank member can be suppressed, and size reduction of a drive device can be achieved.

  Note that the arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission region. For example, when the arm member is moved, a case where the arm member is moved by gravity or an elastic force generated by an auxiliary elastic spring is exemplified.

  In addition, as an insertion part, the hollow of a bottomed recessed shape, the penetrated long hole, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate more than one rotation, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission region when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction, while the crank member is A gaming machine A2 comprising a selection area that becomes the non-transmission area when rotated in another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the crank member. Thus, by changing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotation speed of the crank member, two speed modes of the arm member when the crank member is arranged in the same phase can be formed. The variation of the speed of the arm member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the projection portion and the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the movement direction of the projection portion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a margin part.

  In the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the selection area is formed by providing the insertion part with a margin part, so that other modes for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member are provided. A member can be made unnecessary and material cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position or the second position is formed as an end position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the When the arm member is disposed at one of the second positions, the arm member facing the other of the first position and the second position, which is formed as the terminal position, is opposite to the other of the first position and the second position. A gaming machine A4, wherein a bounce suppression mechanism that suppresses movement is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, when the arm member is disposed at either the first position or the second position formed as the terminal position of the movable range of the arm member, In order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side on the opposite side, it is possible to suppress the driving force that the driving device needs to generate. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

  In addition, as a bounce suppression mechanism, when using the magnetic attraction force, when the movement is suppressed by a claw-shaped member, and the load received by the projection of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member. The case where the insertion part of a member is formed is illustrated.

  When attracted by a magnet, the magnet is necessary as a separate member, but various attractive forces can be generated depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In order to suppress the movement with the claw-shaped member, a drive device that operates the claw-shaped member is necessary, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically stopped with the claw-shaped member.

  When the insertion part of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the projection of the crank member from the arm member is directed to the axis of the crank member, there is no need to provide another member for suppressing the movement of the arm member, The bounce of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is disposed in at least one of the first position or the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion in the vicinity of the connection position of the non-transmission area with the transmission area is The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as a circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the bounce suppression mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is disposed at the first position or the second position. Thereby, the change from the moving state of the arm member to the stopped state can be formed smoothly.

  In the bounce suppression mechanism, the load applied from the insertion part to the protrusion is directed to the rotation shaft of the crank member, so that it is possible to suppress the load from being applied in the rotation direction of the crank member, and the load applied to the drive device is suppressed. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position of the non-transmission area with the transmission area is It is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis, and is loaded with an urging force that moves the arm member from the first position toward the second position, and the non-transmission region of the insertion portion At least one of an inner depression projecting inside the insertion section or an outer depression projecting outside the insertion section with a size capable of accommodating the projection is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, the outer shape near the connection position of the insertion portion with the transmission area of the non-transmission area However, it is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position toward the second position is loaded on the arm member. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is disposed in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the movement of the arm member is prevented by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved in the non-transmission region, the arm member is moved when the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other. That is, when the protrusion is disposed opposite to the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out by the protrusion, and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protruding portion is disposed opposite to the outer depression, the protruding portion is accommodated in the outer depression, and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

  As a result, the movement of the movement of the crank member is different from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion of the crank member moves in the non-transmission area and the protrusion moves through the transmission area by rotating the crank member. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the durability of the driving device and the change in the movement width of the arm member.

  That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device in accordance with the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control burden of the driving device becomes large, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission area, and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, so that the movement of the arm member having a different movement width is formed. The Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the interval between adjacent inner dents or outer dents, the arm member can be operated with a small movement width such as vibration.

  In addition, the aspect which can accommodate a protrusion part may be an aspect in which the entire protrusion part is included in the recessed part, or an aspect in which a part of the protrusion part is included in the recessed part.

<An example of a technical idea for limiting the swinging width of the expansion / contraction production device 540 with the arc-shaped hole 554>
A movable member that is movable along a predetermined movement trajectory and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other, moves corresponding to the movable member, and contacts the movable member to move the movable member. A stopper member that limits a movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes a movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be movable and a stopper member that limits a movement width of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the stopper member is fixed so as not to move, the stopper member is prepared separately for the case where the movable member is arranged at the first position and the case where the movable member is arranged at the second position. There is a problem that the space for disposing the stopper member becomes wide.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the movable member is disposed at the second position when the movable member is disposed at the first position. It can also be used as a stopper member. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions a stopper member can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the stopper member changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the movable member is arranged at the second position, the variation of the movement width of the movable member is increased. be able to.

  Examples of the stopper member include a protruding portion that protrudes from the transmission member and contacts the movable member, an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member, and the like.

  Examples of movement modes include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, swinging, and rotational movement. The movement width in each movement mode means, for example, an actual movement distance or a linear distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, and the like. Or the like means an actual moving distance, a moving angle, or the like.

  In the gaming machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is pivotally supported by the first shaft and that expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, and the first position and the second position are The extension length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement trajectory is formed in an arc shape centered on the first axis, and the stopper member is formed when the intermediate member is in a predetermined extension / contraction state. A gaming machine B2 that extends along the predetermined movement locus of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported about the first axis so as to be able to swing and can be extended and contracted in the radial direction of the first axis. A member is provided. Therefore, the curvature radius of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member around the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state). The curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member is the same). In this case, when the intermediate member is in a predetermined stretched state, the movable member is moved along the stopper member, and the movable member can be moved in the extending direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

  On the other hand, when the intermediate member is in an expanded / contracted state different from the predetermined expanded / contracted state, the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different. The trajectory and the extending direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion protruding toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is connected to the insertion portion. In the inserted state, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, since the protrusion of the movable member is inserted into the insertion part of the stopper member, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member. The drive device that expands and contracts the movable member and the drive device that moves the stopper member can be combined. Further, the insertion portion regulates the movement of the movable member by being in contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  In the gaming machine B3, when the intermediate member expands and contracts, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the intermediate member is expanded and contracted, so that the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side. Thereby, the movement width of a movable member can be changed with the case where a 1st axis | shaft is arrange | positioned at the inner peripheral side of an insertion part, and the case where a 1st axis | shaft is arrange | positioned at the outer peripheral side of an insertion part.

  That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along the predetermined movement locus follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along the predetermined movement locus is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed by the movement locus and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so that the posture can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member, and the contact position between the movable member and the insertion portion when the insertion portion is changed in posture. Is changed, and the moving width of the predetermined moving locus of the movable member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion part while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the protrusion portion to enter and exit along the movement locus, and the protrusion portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning auxiliary portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protruding portion is separated from the insertion portion through the groove portion, and the movable member is in the separated state A positioning auxiliary portion engaged with the stopper member is provided. Therefore, compared to the operation range of the movable member, the formation range of the stopper member can be reduced, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the displacement between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. Can be prevented. That is, even if the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the positioning assisting portion suppresses the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member, so that the protrusion can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<An example of the technical idea of supporting the two-stage production member 620 supported upside down>
A base member, a movable member supported by a support portion formed on the base member so as to be displaceable and moving upward from a predetermined position, a driving device for generating a driving force for displacing the movable member, and a connection to the movable member And a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, and the transmission member is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position by transmission of driving force by a gear (for example, JP, 2011-120640, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the moving amount of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of resolution of the control of the drive device (for example, one step in the case of a stepping motor) is the support portion of the movable member. To the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes more difficult as the center of gravity of the movable member is separated from the support portion in the radial direction.

  In addition, when the center of gravity of the movable member is shifted to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion, the movable member is inverted by generating a driving force that displaces the movable member in the opposite direction. Even if the state is maintained, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity coincide with each other, and the movable member is greatly displaced.

  Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the support portion, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged right above the support portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member. The length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the shaft support portion is formed shorter than the length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the support portion. Therefore, even when the movable member is elongated in the radial direction of the support portion, it is possible to suppress the movement amount of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated with the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion.

  As a mode in which the movable member is supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, A compound aspect etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission member has a shorter arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, as the movable member displaced about the support portion moves upward from a predetermined position, the transmission member from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member is improved. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved as compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant.

  For example, when the rotational speed of the drive device that rotates the transmission member operates at a constant speed, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is first. A description will be given assuming that the second length is fixed to be shorter than the first length. When the rotational speed of the driving device is constant, the transmission member is fixed at the first length compared to the case where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member is increased when the member is arranged in a predetermined phase.

  Here, in the vicinity of the predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at a speed generated when the transmission member is the first arm length, and the speed generated when the transmission member is the second arm length near the inverted state. Consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method for that purpose, a method of changing the rotational speed of the driving device in the middle is conceivable, but it cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotational speed of the driving device. In addition, even if the rotational speed of the drive device can be changed, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is necessary to change the rotational speed in the middle, which increases the cost. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion on which the transmission member is pivotally supported to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is determined so that the transmission member is at a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward. Therefore, the transmission member can be set to the first arm length in the vicinity of the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to the second arm length in the vicinity of the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

  The configuration in which the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position of the transmission member and the movable member is fixed is exemplified by a case where a protrusion protruding from the transmission member is inserted and connected to the movable member. The The arm length can be changed by forming a long hole in the transmission member, and when the protrusion protruding from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member. Examples include a case where a long hole is provided in a portion where the member is supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft rod is formed through the long hole from the base member.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member includes a protruding portion that protrudes in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is a long hole that extends in a radial direction of the shaft support portion. A gaming machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

  In the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion portion, whereby the transmission member and the movable member Are connected, the moving direction of the connecting position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support portion. Therefore, as the transmission arm swings, the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

  In addition, as an insertion part, the elongate hole formed by penetration, the recessed part formed as a bottomed hollow, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C3, the shaft support portion is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed on a straight line connecting the support portion and the projection portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the protruding portion is arranged vertically above the supporting portion, the center of gravity of the supporting portion, the shaft support portion, the protruding portion, and the movable member is It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is loaded vertically downward with respect to the support portion and the shaft support portion. For this reason, no force in the rotational direction is applied to the movable member, so that the posture of the movable member can be maintained even when the power of the driving device is interrupted. Thereby, the burden of a drive device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C4, a gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the rotation of the driving device is decelerated by the worm gear.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the rotation of the driving device is decelerated by the worm gear. The movement width of the movable member when operating with the minimum unit of resolution can be greatly reduced. In addition, since the transmission direction of the force via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the drive device when the vehicle is stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the game machine includes an urging device that generates an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and the urging force is A gaming machine C6, wherein the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state in which the movable member is disposed vertically above the support portion, and becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support, and the biasing force is based on the center of gravity of the movable member. It becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

  Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from a predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive device that moves the movable member upward from the state where the movable member is disposed at the predetermined position by increasing the biasing force.

  Further, the urging force is generated in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved up from a predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, the posture of the movable member is inverted by the biasing force even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state. Can be directed to. Thereby, it can be made easy to stop a movable member in an inverted state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that in the second state, the rate of change in the urging force when the displacement is the same is greater in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state where the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the displaced second state, the rate of change of the urging force when the displacement is the same is larger. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to suppress a burden at the time of starting the drive device. Moreover, since the acceleration of a movable member when a movable member is arrange | positioned near an inverted state can be reduced, it can be made easy to stop a movable member in an inverted state.

<An example of a technical idea in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during swinging>
A movable member formed to be movable between the first position and the second position, a drive device for generating a drive force for moving the movable member, and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. And a biasing device for generating the movable member, wherein the movable member is movable with respect to a change rate of a biasing force generated when the movable member is disposed in a first biasing region from the first position to a predetermined position. The rate of change in biasing force that occurs when the member is disposed in a second biasing region that is connected to the first biasing region and is formed away from the first position is increased. A gaming machine D1 characterized by that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that uses an urging force of an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when the movable member is moved by the driving force generated by the driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). -1264040). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the urging force of the urging device is proportionally increased by the amount of displacement of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the urging device by the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that. That is, it is difficult to make the movement of the movable member smooth by suppressing the urging force in a certain area, and to improve the urging force and make the movement of the movable member abrupt in another area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the change rate of the urging force urged toward the first position is such that the movable member is attached to the second portion as compared with the case where the movable member is disposed in the first urging region. The case where it is arranged in the force area is enlarged. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started toward the first position (second urging region), a sufficient urging force can be obtained by the urging device, while the movable member is in the first position. When arranged in the urging region, the change in the urging force is suppressed, and the operation of the movable member can be performed smoothly (slowly).

  In addition, as a mode in which the change rate of the urging force of the urging device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, the number of urging devices that cause the movable member to generate an urging amount increases in the middle, A case where the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D1, the biasing device is a pair of long members that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and are respectively disposed on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. And the other end portion, which is an end portion on the opposite side of the one end portion, is formed from an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A main body sandwiched between a pair of long members; and formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of long members and in contact with at least one of the pair of long members in the moving direction of the main body portion. An abutting portion formed so as to be able to come into contact, and the abutting portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Among the long members, the movement of the movable member A biasing force is applied by being brought into contact with one long member on the side closer to the movable member, and the movable member has a biasing force due to a contact between the other long member and the contact portion. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being given.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the change in the change rate of the urging force by the urging device is shifted for each long member with respect to the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members. Can be formed. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the urging force of the urging device by the control or to prepare another member for improving the urging force.

  That is, since the other end of the pair of long members is restricted from moving, the one long member on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moved. The other long member on the opposite side does not receive a force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member moves, the other long member disposed on the side opposite to the moving direction of the movable member remains in place.

  On the other hand, in the second urging region, the other long member is brought into contact with the contact portion by moving the movable member. Thereby, a biasing force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, it is possible to increase the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region.

  Examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and are respectively disposed on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. And the other end, which is an end opposite to the one end, is formed from an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A body portion sandwiched between the pair of long members; and at least one of the pair of long members formed on the opposite side of the body portion with respect to the pair of long members and moving in the body portion An abutting portion formed so as to be abuttable, and the abutting portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Of the pair of long members, the movable member When the movable member is brought into contact with one long member that is closer to the movable member due to the movement and applied with an urging force, and the movable member is disposed in the second urging region, the one long member is disposed. The game machine D3 is characterized in that an intermediate portion of the game machine is pressed against a contact portion disposed on one long member side with respect to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change in the change ratio of the urging force is formed by pressing the middle part of one long member against the contact part. That is, one of the long members that has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion that is pressed against the contact portion, thereby causing a change in the change rate of the biasing force. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to the deformation is shorter than the deformation starting from the other end, so the ratio of the change in the biasing force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the 2nd energizing field, change of energizing force to the amount of movement of the movable member can be increased. Therefore, the change rate of the urging force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D3, the one long member includes a first bending point that is bent toward the abutting portion that is disposed to face the one long member, and the one long member is the first bending point. A gaming machine D4, which is pressed against the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, since one long member is brought into contact with the contact portion disposed oppositely at the first bending point, the one long member is brought into contact. It is extended by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip portion of the urging device that applies the urging force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the long member that is the starting point of the urging force and the first bending point. Therefore, the moment that the movable member is loaded from the urging device in the second urging region can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes a tip enlarged region that is enlarged in the moving direction as the distance from the other end of the elongated member increases, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is expanded in the tip enlarged region. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the end portion of the gaming machine D5 is brought into contact with the gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged region, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip enlarged region. Therefore, when one long member is extended by pressing one long member against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the long member is separated from the other end of the long member. The amount of deformation of the long member is increased. Therefore, the urging force loaded from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D5, variations in the change in the biasing force generated by the long member can be increased. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of a technical idea in which a plurality of out openings are provided and the buffer rib 322 is formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside the game area in which the ball is allowed to flow down, the in-board role arranged in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the ball formed on one side in the width direction of the in-board role A first out port which is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second out port which is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the in-board accessory which is opposite to the one side in the width direction and which discharges a ball from the game area The first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower surface of the opening to the front surface and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide of the lower plate portion. The surface includes buffer ribs extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the corresponding side in the first out port or the second out port, and is formed to be raised from the guide surface on the outer side in the width direction. The buffer rib has an aspect ratio that goes outward in the width direction. Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is formed smaller.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of outlets are arranged (see, for example, JP-A-9-192301). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is preferable to reduce the size of each out port as the number of out ports increases. There was a problem that the discharge of game balls could be delayed.

  For example, when the height at which the sphere bounces up and down on the front side of the out mouth becomes equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out mouth, the sphere stays in front of the out mouth. Further, for example, when a side surface is disposed on the side surface in the width direction of the out port to form a wall, the ball that has flowed from the width direction to the front side of the out port collides with the side surface of the role and rebounds in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebounding in the width direction is equal to or greater than the lateral width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the buffer rib is formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate part, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the ball or to decelerate the ball. In other words, when the ball collides from the up and down direction, the buffer rib is bent and deformed, so that the buffer rib becomes a cushion and the rebound of the ball can be suppressed. Further, when the ball collides from the left and right direction, the ball is braked by being caught in the buffer rib.

  Here, the buffer rib extending in the opening direction is vulnerable to a load from the left-right direction and may be damaged by a collision of a ball from the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface includes the step portion on the outer side in the width direction, the sphere that flows down from the left and right direction toward the buffer rib falls from the top of the step portion to the buffer rib. . In this case, the vertical component of the direction of collision of the sphere with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the step portion has a function of stopping a sphere that moves in the left-right direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the sphere that moves on the guide surface from bouncing over the lateral width of the out port.

  Since the buffer rib is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, a large rebound suppressing effect can be obtained in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the falling balls tend to concentrate. Thereby, a ball | bowl can be discharged | emitted smoothly from an out port. Moreover, the arrangement | positioning position of an out port can be corrected below by match | combining the curve of the lower side of a game area | region, and the lower surface of a buffer rib.

  Here, the higher the formation height of the buffer ribs, the greater the effect of suppressing the ball rebound is because the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs increases. That is, the greater the amount of deflection of the buffer rib, the more effective the cushion effect is, and the bounce can be easily suppressed. For this reason, it is preferable for the bounce suppression effect to make the aspect ratio of the buffer rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant).

  On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer rib is constant (the length in the vertical direction is constant), it is necessary to increase the height of the stepped portion, and the path of the sphere leading to the stepped portion is also upward As a result, the game area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer ribs is reduced on the outer side in the width direction of the gaming area where the falling balls are difficult to concentrate, and the center in the width direction of the gaming area where the falling balls are likely to concentrate. Then, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is increased. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the ball discharge efficiency and the securing of the game area.

  In addition, extending in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means extending in the opening direction in a shape such as a straight line, a waveform, and a mountain shape.

  In the gaming machine E1, the guide surface includes an outer inclined portion that is inclined downward toward the outer side in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the guide surface has an outer inclined portion, so that the speed of the sphere flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be decelerated by gravity acceleration. Deceleration time can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a gaming machine E3 is characterized in that a non-flowing region where a ball cannot flow down is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the flow of the sphere flowing in the diagonally downward direction from the non-flowing area toward the guide surface is limited, so the sphere flow down to the guide surface The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the direction in which the ball that has flowed down bounces back. Thereby, the external shape of at least one of a 1st out port or a 2nd out port can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine E3, in the non-flowing area, an opening / closing device disposed in the gaming area and capable of opening and closing to the front side is disposed above at least one of the first out port and the second out port. The gaming machine E4 is formed on the front side of the opening / closing device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, a non-flowing region is formed by the opening / closing device. Thereby, the space which arises by suppressing the opening dimension of the direction desired to the non-flowing area | region side of a 1st out port or a 2nd out port can be utilized as an installation space of an opening / closing device.

  In the closed state, the opening / closing device causes the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing device to flow downward in the gaming area, and in the open state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing apparatus is moved backward in the gaming area. Has the function of flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form the non-flowing region as compared with a case where the sphere flows irregularly by colliding with a nail or the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port. The resistance to the sphere flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<An example of the technical idea of adjusting the degree of advantage for each flow path>
Distributing means that is arranged in the game area where the game balls flow down and distributes the game balls to the first flow path or the second flow path, and is distributed to the second flow path by the distribution means. A first profit means that gives a player a benefit when the game ball passes, and a game ball that passes downstream of the sorting means can pass and the game ball passes. And a second profit means for providing a profit to the player, the game ball distributed to the first flow path is more than the game ball distributed to the second flow path, The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that a ratio toward the second profit means is increased.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that has a guide path through which a game ball that has passed through a through gate is guided to a start winning opening, and that can adjust a rate of winning from the guiding path to the starting winning opening (for example, special No. 2001-70526). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball that has passed through the through gate has a high advantage (the opening of the start winning opening is highly likely to win the start winning opening), and the ball that has not passed through the through gate is advantageous. The degree is low (it is unlikely to win the starting prize opening because the starting prize opening is kept closed), and whether it is easy to pass through the through gate will directly benefit the player, so the through gate There is a problem that the profit of the player greatly increases or decreases depending on how much the ball is guided.

  In other words, if it is difficult for the ball to go to the through gate, the player cannot gain profits to the extent that the player feels uncomfortable. Conversely, if the ball is easy to go to the through gate, the prize ball is extremely There is a risk that it will increase and result in damage to the profits of the amusement store. Therefore, for example, if the ball flow is adjusted easily because the ball goes easily to the through gate due to the goto action of bending a nail, it becomes difficult to maintain the balance between the player's profit and the profit of the game shop. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the game ball passing through the first flow path is the second profit means than the game ball passing through the second flow path that may pass through the first profit means. Since the ratio toward the second flow path is increased, the adjustment of the profit between the case where the game ball is brought into the second flow path and the case where the game ball is brought into the first flow path is naturally performed. It is possible to prevent the profit balance between the player and the game store from being extremely disrupted between the case where it is easy to go to the two flow paths and the case where it is easy to go to the first flow path.

  In addition, as a profit given to a player, it does not specifically limit and various aspects are illustrated. For example, it is exemplified as a benefit given to the player that a prize ball is obtained, or that an electric accessory that closes the starting port is opened with a certain probability.

  In the gaming machine F1, a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state can be formed, and the second profit means includes an open state in which a gaming ball can pass and a gaming ball The state is switched between a closed state incapable of passing, and the benefit given to the player when the game ball passes through the first profit means is the open state of the second profit means in the first game state. And in the second gaming state, the second profit means switches to an open state regardless of whether or not a game ball has passed through the first profit means. A gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1, when a large number of gaming balls are distributed to the second flow path, the number of gaming balls that pass through the first profit means can be increased in the first gaming state. While it is advantageous that it is easy to open the profit means, in the second gaming state, it is possible to form a game characteristic that is disadvantageous as much waste balls that pass through the second flow path and do not pass through the second profit means increase. When a large number of game balls are allocated to one flow path, the number of game balls passing through the first profit means in the first game state is reduced, and the second profit means is difficult to open. In this state, it is possible to form a game property that is advantageous as much as it is possible to pass a lot of game balls distributed to the first flow path to the second profit means without waste.

  In other words, even if there is a bias in the distribution of the distribution means, it is possible to change the advantage and disadvantage by changing the game state, so even if the player's profit in one game state decreases, the other By increasing the profits of the player in the gaming state, it is possible to balance the profits obtained by the player. Thereby, it can suppress that a player's profit greatly increases / decreases by the adjustment bias of the distribution means.

  The gaming machine F1 or F2 includes changing means disposed on the upstream side of the first flow path of the second profit means, and the changing means indicates the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first flow path. A gaming machine F3, which is formed in a manner of changing in a direction toward the second profit means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the changing means changes the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first flow path in the direction toward the second profit means, so the changing means Even if the game ball flows away from the second profit means on the upstream side, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed to the flow direction toward the second profit means on the downstream side of the change means. it can. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which game balls that have flowed down the first flow path (game balls that have not passed through the first profit means) pass through the second profit means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the game machine includes changing means disposed at a position where the game ball that has passed through the first profit means passes while heading toward the second profit means, and the second profit means includes: The state is switched between an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass, and the benefit given to the player when the game ball passes through the first profit means is Switching the second profit means to an open state in one gaming state, wherein the changing means is configured such that a game ball that has passed the first profit means causes the second profit to be triggered by the passage. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the flow-down mode of the game ball is changed so as to flow down in a mode of reaching the second profit means after the device is in an open state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second profit means is opened before the changing means reaches the second profit means from the first profit means. Since the flow-down mode of the game ball is changed (for example, decelerated), the game ball that has passed through the first profit means is directly used as the second profit means while the arrangement interval between the first profit means and the second profit means is narrowed. Can be passed through. Thereby, it is possible to increase the value of game balls passing through the first profit means and reduce the useless balls, shorten the arrangement interval of the first profit means and the second profit means, and suppress the arrangement space. Can do.

  For example, when the profit given to the player by passing the game ball through the second profit means is a special symbol drawing, the first profit can be reduced by narrowing the interval between the first profit means and the second profit means. Since the period until the game ball that has passed the means passes the second profit means can be shortened, the game balls can be passed through the second profit means one after another. According to this configuration, while aiming to increase the frequency of the lottery by extremely shortening the fluctuation related to the special symbol lottery, the ball does not pass through the second profit means within the free time generated between the fluctuations, The situation where the player gets bored can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the changing means is distributed to the first change path for causing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to flow down in a direction away from the second profit means, and to the second flow path. And a second change path that causes the game ball to flow down toward the second profit means, and the game ball is decelerated when the game ball passes through the second change path. F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the displacement means causes the first change path that causes a part of the game balls distributed to the second flow path to flow away from the second profit means. And a second change path that decelerates the game sphere toward the second profit means, so that the ball that flows down in the first change path actively makes a dead ball, and flows down in the second change path The sphere can be easily passed through the second profit means. Thereby, the minimum ball can be positively made a dead ball while giving a certain profit to the player. The dead ball means a ball that enters and exits the outlet without being involved in the prize ball.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the changing means is formed from an overhanging portion that protrudes inward of the game area along the thickness direction of the game board, and extends along the thickness direction of the game board. A gaming machine F6, wherein a game ball is allowed to pass through the area.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the game ball can pass through the area of the changing means that is formed in the thickness direction of the gaming board. The width of the flow path through which the game ball can pass can be kept large compared to the case where the region through which the ball can pass is narrowed and decelerated (for example, when nails are implanted). Thereby, even if the game ball flows into the change means from multiple directions while suppressing the arrangement space of the change means, it is possible to prevent the decelerated game balls from staying and causing a clogged ball.

  In addition, by using a member that cannot be easily deformed unlike a nail (for example, using a member similar to a plastic member that forms a game board), game characteristics can be obtained by an action similar to a goto action that deforms a nail. Can be prevented from changing.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a merging region where the game balls distributed by the distribution flow path rejoin, a discharge port for discharging the gaming balls flowing into the merging region toward the outlet, The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that an inflow direction of the game ball flowing from the first flow path into the merge area is a direction away from the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the inflow direction of the game ball flowing from the first flow path to the merge area is the direction away from the discharge port. It is possible to suppress the game ball that has flowed from the flow path into the merge area from being discharged from the discharge port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path are discharged to the outlet, and as a result, increase the rate at which game balls flowing down the first flow path pass through the second profit means. Can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the game machine includes a changing means that is arranged upstream of the second profit means and is arranged to allow a game ball that has passed through the first profit means to pass therethrough. The gaming machine F8, wherein the profit means, the second profit means, and the changing means are configured as one unit.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first profit means, the second profit means, and the change means are configured as one unit, so the first profit means Compared to the case where a nail or the like is disposed between the second profit means and the flow path of the sphere is formed, the arrangement space between the first profit means and the second profit means can be suppressed. Thereby, the design freedom of the other part of the game area can be improved.

  Moreover, by comprising as one unit, it can suppress that the relative positional relationship of a 1st profit means, a 2nd profit means, and a change means changes. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down along a route different from the design intention by changing the relative positional relationship between the first profit means, the second profit means, and the changing means.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F8, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that has a winning opening in a gaming area, a ball can reach the winning opening from multiple directions, and can be won (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). .
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in the flow of the ball to the winning opening.
This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with a good flow of a ball to a winning opening.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is arranged in a game area where game balls flow down and distributes the game balls to two channels of the first channel or the second channel. A first profit means that allows a game ball distributed to the second flow path by the distribution means to pass through the game ball and that gives a player a benefit by passing the game ball; A gaming machine comprising a second profit means for allowing a game ball passing through the downstream to pass through and allowing the player to benefit by passing the game ball, wherein the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. Rather, the proportion of the game balls distributed to the first flow path toward the second profit means is increased.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 can form a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the second profit means The state is switched between an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass, and the benefit given to the player when the game ball passes through the first profit means is In the first gaming state, the method includes switching the second profit means to an open state, and in the second gaming state, the second profit means passes a game ball through the first profit means. Regardless of whether or not it switches to the open state.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, comprising a changing means arranged on the upstream side of the first flow path of the second profit means, the changing means being The flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first flow path is changed in a direction toward the second profit means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the flow of the ball to the winning opening.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to relate the flow-down mode of the ball and the gaming state.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the flow of the ball can be further improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 65 1st variable prize-winning device (opening / closing device, part of 2nd profit means)
67 Through gate (1st profit means)
640a Electric character 640b Second prize opening (winning prize, part of the second profit means)
313 Movable production member (inside board)
314 First out port 315 Second out port 315a Guide rib (direction adjusting rib)
320 Left lower plate member (lower plate)
322 Buffer rib 324 Step 330 Right lower plate member (lower plate portion)
332 Buffer rib 512 First shaft portion (first shaft)
540, 6540 Expansion / contraction production device (movable member)
541 Body member (part of intermediate member)
544 Slide plate (part of intermediate member)
545 Slide rail (part of intermediate member)
541b Protruding part 541e Guide fastening part (positioning auxiliary part)
550, 5550, 6550 Rotating arm member (arm member, stopper member)
553 irregularly shaped long hole (insertion part)
553d Selection wall (selection area)
554 Arc-shaped hole (insertion part)
554a Mouth (groove)
554b First stopper surface (a part of the insertion part)
554c Second stopper surface (a part of the insertion part)
560 Second drive device (drive device)
570 Rotating crank member (crank member)
574 Sliding projection (projection)
610, 7610 Base member 613 First shaft support hole (support portion)
614 Second shaft support hole (shaft support)
620, 4620 Production member (movable member)
621a Sliding shaft (projection)
630 1st drive device (drive device)
640, 2640, 3640, 4640, 7640 Transmission member (transmission member, movable member)
641,2641,3641 Main body 643 Sliding hole (insertion part)
644 Contact portion 650 Torsion spring (biasing device, elastic spring)
652 Energizing arm (long member)
653a bent portion (first bending point)
3641a Inclined side surface (tip enlarged region)
5556 recess (outside recess)
7613 Sliding hole (supporting part)
7643 Shaft support hole (insertion part)
8812 Concave portion (part of changing means)
8825c1 Discharge port 8826 Direction change part (part of change means)
8826a First protrusion (part of changing means)
8826b Second protrusion (part of changing means)
8826c 3rd convex part (a part of changing means)
8826d Fourth convex portion (part of changing means)
10832a 1st extended claw part (a part of changing means)
10832b 2nd extended claw part (a part of changing means)
10833b 4th extended claw part (a part of changing means)
B83 Fourth flow path (part of first change path)
D margin L81 locus (part of the first flow path)
O81 first flow path (part of the second flow path)
X81 1st path | route (a part of 2nd flow path, a part of 2nd change path | route)
X82 2nd path (part of 2nd flow path)
Y81 Flow path (part of the first flow path)
P81, P82, P83, P84 Nail (part of sorting means)
X91 Downstream path (part of the second flow path)
S81 merge area

Claims (2)

Distributing means that is arranged in the game area where the game balls flow down and distributes the game balls to the two channels of the first channel or the second channel;
A first profit means to benefit to the player by the game ball, which is distributed to the second flow path at the distributing means is can pass through, a game ball passes,
A gaming machine comprising: a second profit means that allows a game ball passing downstream of the distribution means to pass through, and provides a benefit to the player by passing the game ball;
A predetermined means disposed on the upstream side of the first flow path of the second profit means;
The predetermined means is formed in such a manner that the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first flow path can be changed to the direction toward the second profit means, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the second flow path Can be branched by a first path toward the second profit means and a second path deviating from the second profit means,
Said first flow path to the game ball apportioned, the than game balls distributed to the second flow path, the game machine ratio toward the front Stories second benefit means, characterized in that it is larger. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box .

Images